WO2024029672A1 - Stylus pen - Google Patents

Abstract

A stylus pen according to an embodiment of the present invention interacts with a touch input device comprising a sensor part and a control part for controlling the sensor part. The stylus pen according to an embodiment comprises: a body part having at least a portion extending in one direction; an inductor part comprising a ferrite core disposed in the body part, and a coil wound, in multiple layers, on at least a portion of the ferrite core; a capacitor part comprising a capacitor which is disposed in the body part and is electrically connected to the coil of the inductor part; and a core body having at least a portion disposed in the body part, the core body being moved in the one direction by pressure applied to one end thereof. The capacitor part comprises a first electrode operating in conjunction with the core body and a second electrode fixedly installed on the first electrode in the one direction. The capacitance of the capacitor part is changed by the pressure applied to the one end of the core body.

Description

stylus pen

This disclosure relates to a stylus pen.

Cell phones, smart phones, laptop computers, digital broadcasting terminals, PDAs (personal digital assistants), PMPs (portable multimedia players), navigation, slate PCs, tablet PCs, Various touch input devices such as ultrabooks and wearable devices are equipped with touch sensors.

In such a touch input device, the touch sensor may be located on a display panel that displays an image, or may be located in a portion of the touch input device. When a user interacts with a touch input device by touching the touch sensor, the touch input device can provide an intuitive user interface to the user.

Users can use a stylus pen for precise touch input. Stylus pens can be divided into active stylus pens and passive stylus pens depending on whether a battery and electronic components are provided inside.

Active stylus pens have superior basic performance compared to passive stylus pens and have the advantage of providing additional functions (pen pressure, hovering, buttons), but the pen itself is expensive and requires power to charge the battery. The downside is that there are not many actual users other than some advanced users.

Passive stylus pens have the advantage of being cheaper than active stylus pens and do not require batteries, but they have the disadvantage of being difficult to recognize precise touches compared to active stylus pens. However, recently, in order to implement a passive stylus pen capable of sophisticated touch recognition, EMR (Electro Magnetic Resonance) technology, which is an inductive resonance method, and capacitive resonance technology have been proposed.

The EMR method is superior in writing/drawing quality, which is the core function of a stylus pen, but has the disadvantage of being thicker and more expensive because a separate EMR sensor panel and EMR driving IC must be added in addition to the capacitance touch panel.

The capacitive resonance method uses a general capacitance touch sensor and touch controller IC without additional cost, but also supports pen touch by increasing the performance of the IC.

In the EMR method or capacitive resonance method, in order for the touch sensor to more accurately identify the touch by the stylus pen, the amplitude of the resonance signal must be large, and accordingly, the frequency of the driving signal transmitted to the stylus pen must be adjusted to the resonance built into the stylus pen. Make it approximately equal to the resonant frequency of the circuit. However, according to the conventional EMR method or the capacitive resonance method, even if the resonance frequency and the frequency of the driving signal match, the attenuation of signal transmission is very large, making signal transmission difficult. As a result, despite long-term attempts by numerous touch controller IC vendors, no company has yet succeeded in mass producing the touch controller because a sufficient output signal has not been produced.

Therefore, in order to manufacture an EMR type or capacitive resonance stylus pen that can produce the maximum output signal, how to design the internal resonance circuit and pen structure becomes a very important factor.

Meanwhile, in the case of an EMR (Electro-Magnetic Resonance) type pen among passive stylus pens, after the digitizer transmits an electromagnetic signal to the pen, the digitizer receives a resonance signal from the pen. In this digitizer, coils through which current can be induced by magnetic signals are densely arranged in order to receive touch information by a pen. These digitizers have problems in that they cannot respond to miniaturization and thinning of touch input devices and cannot be designed flexibly.

Meanwhile, conventional stylus pens require the use of expensive pressure sensors to detect pen pressure, and it is difficult to measure pen pressure precisely.

The present embodiments provide a stylus pen capable of interacting with a touch input device.

Additionally, a stylus pen capable of producing a sufficient output signal is provided.

Additionally, a stylus pen capable of operating with a multi-functional touch input device capable of detecting the touch position, driving the stylus pen, and detecting the position of the stylus pen is provided.

In addition, a stylus pen that can operate with a touch input device is provided, which can solve the problem that the output voltage of the sensing circuit unit varies depending on the position of the stylus pen.

In addition, when the screen of the touch input device is enlarged to the size of the screen of a tablet PC, a stylus pen that can operate with a touch input device that can widen the operating frequency bandwidth of the touch driving signal and the pen driving signal is provided. .

In addition, when the screen of the touch input device is enlarged to the size of the screen of a tablet PC, a stylus pen that can operate with a touch input device that can alleviate the attenuation of the pen detection signal is provided.

Additionally, a stylus pen that can operate with a touch input device including a sensor unit that can be implemented on one layer is provided.

Additionally, a stylus pen that can operate with a touch input device that can improve touch detection performance by a stylus pen is provided.

Additionally, a stylus pen capable of detecting pen pressure with a simple structure is provided.

Additionally, a stylus pen capable of distinguishing the contact state of the stylus pen with respect to a touch input device is provided.

The problems to be solved by the present invention are not limited to the problems described above.

A stylus pen according to an embodiment of the present invention is a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit, wherein the sensor unit is formed to extend along a first direction and is located on the first side. a plurality of first patterns whose ends are electrically connected to the control unit; a plurality of second patterns extending in the first direction and disposed adjacent to the first pattern; a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit; and a plurality of fourth patterns extending in the second direction and disposed adjacent to the third pattern, wherein second side ends of at least some of the plurality of second patterns are electrically connected to each other, Second end portions of at least some of the plurality of fourth patterns are electrically connected to each other, and the controller applies a touch driving signal to the plurality of first patterns and a touch detection signal to the plurality of third patterns. For receiving, the control unit is for applying a stylus pen driving signal to at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first to fourth patterns, and the control unit is for applying a stylus pen driving signal to the plurality of first patterns to fourth patterns. It is for receiving stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the fourth patterns, wherein the stylus pen includes: a body portion at least partially extending along one direction; an inductor unit including a ferrite core disposed in the body unit and a coil wound in a multi-layer structure on at least a portion of the ferrite core; a capacitor portion disposed within the body portion and including a capacitor electrically connected to the coil of the inductor portion; and a core at least partially disposed within the body and moving along the one direction by pressure applied to one end, wherein the capacitor portion includes a first electrode interlocking with the core and the first electrode in the one direction. It includes a second electrode fixedly installed on one electrode, and the capacitance of the capacitor portion changes depending on the pressure applied to one end of the core body.

A stylus pen according to another embodiment of the present invention is a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit, wherein the sensor unit is formed to extend along a first direction and is located on the first side. a plurality of first patterns whose ends are electrically connected to the control unit; a plurality of second patterns extending in the first direction and disposed adjacent to the first pattern; a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit; and a plurality of fourth patterns extending in the second direction and disposed adjacent to the third pattern, wherein second side ends of at least some of the plurality of second patterns are electrically connected to each other, Second end portions of at least some of the plurality of fourth patterns are electrically connected to each other, and the controller applies a touch driving signal to the plurality of first patterns and a touch detection signal to the plurality of third patterns. For receiving, the control unit is for applying a stylus pen driving signal to at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first to fourth patterns, and the control unit is for applying a stylus pen driving signal to the plurality of first patterns to fourth patterns. It is for receiving stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the fourth patterns, wherein the stylus pen includes: a body portion; an inductor unit fixedly installed in the body unit and including a ferrite core having a through hole penetrating in one direction, and a coil wound in a multi-layer manner on at least a portion of the ferrite core; A capacitor unit located within the body unit and including a capacitor electrically connected to the coil of the inductor unit; and a core body in which at least a portion between one end and the other end is disposed in the through hole of the ferrite core and moves along the one direction by pressure applied to the one end, wherein the capacitor portion is located at the other end of the core body. a first electrode connected to the core body; and a second electrode fixedly installed on the first electrode, wherein the first electrode moves in the one direction due to pressure applied to one end of the core body, thereby causing a gap between the first electrode and the second electrode. The overlap area changes.

A stylus pen according to another embodiment of the present invention is a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit, wherein the sensor unit is formed to extend along a first direction and has a first a plurality of first patterns whose side ends are electrically connected to the control unit; a plurality of second patterns extending in the first direction and disposed adjacent to the first pattern; a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit; and a plurality of fourth patterns extending in the second direction and disposed adjacent to the third pattern, wherein second side ends of at least some of the plurality of second patterns are electrically connected to each other, Second end portions of at least some of the plurality of fourth patterns are electrically connected to each other, and the controller applies a touch driving signal to the plurality of first patterns and a touch detection signal to the plurality of third patterns. for receiving a stylus pen driving signal, wherein the control unit is configured to apply a stylus pen driving signal to at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first to fourth patterns, wherein at least a portion of the stylus pen moves in one direction. a body portion formed to extend along; an inductor unit including a ferrite core disposed in the body unit and a coil wound in a multi-layer structure on at least a portion of the ferrite core; a capacitor portion disposed within the body portion and including a capacitor electrically connected to the coil of the inductor portion; and a core at least partially disposed within the body and moving along the one direction by pressure applied to one end, wherein the ferrite core of the inductor portion is interlocked with the core, and the inductor portion is located inside the body portion. It includes a magnetic body fixedly installed on the core, and the inductance of the inductor portion changes by pressure applied to one end of the core.

A stylus pen according to another embodiment of the present invention is a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit, wherein the sensor unit is formed to extend along a first direction and has a first a plurality of first patterns whose side ends are electrically connected to the control unit; a plurality of second patterns extending in the first direction and disposed adjacent to the first pattern; a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit; and a plurality of fourth patterns extending in the second direction and disposed adjacent to the third pattern, wherein second side ends of at least some of the plurality of second patterns are electrically connected to each other, Second end portions of at least some of the plurality of fourth patterns are electrically connected to each other, and the controller applies a touch driving signal to the plurality of first patterns and a touch detection signal to the plurality of third patterns. For receiving, the control unit is for applying a stylus pen driving signal to at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first to fourth patterns, and the stylus pen includes a body portion; an inductor unit disposed within the body unit and including a ferrite core having a through hole penetrating in one direction, and a coil wound in a multi-layer structure on at least a portion of the ferrite core; A capacitor unit located within the body unit and including a capacitor electrically connected to the coil of the inductor unit; and a core body in which at least a portion between one end and the other end is disposed in the through hole of the ferrite core and moves along the one direction by pressure applied to the one end, wherein the ferrite core of the inductor portion is connected to the core body. It is combined with and interlocks with the core body, and the inductor portion includes a magnetic body fixedly installed inside the body portion, and the ferrite core moves in the one direction by the pressure applied to one end of the core body and is connected to the ferrite core. The separation distance between the magnetic materials changes.

A stylus pen according to another embodiment of the present invention is a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit, wherein the sensor unit is formed to extend along a first direction and has a first a plurality of first patterns whose side ends are electrically connected to the control unit; a plurality of second patterns extending in the first direction and disposed adjacent to the first pattern; a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit; and a plurality of fourth patterns extending in the second direction and disposed adjacent to the third pattern, wherein second side ends of at least some of the plurality of second patterns are electrically connected to each other, Second end portions of at least some of the plurality of fourth patterns are electrically connected to each other, and the controller applies a touch driving signal to the plurality of first patterns and a touch detection signal to the plurality of third patterns. For receiving, the control unit is for applying a stylus pen driving signal to at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first to fourth patterns, and the control unit is for applying a stylus pen driving signal to the plurality of first patterns to fourth patterns. It is for receiving stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the fourth patterns, wherein the stylus pen includes: a body portion at least partially extending along one direction; an inductor unit including a ferrite core disposed in the body unit and a coil wound in a multi-layer structure on at least a portion of the ferrite core; a capacitor unit disposed within the body unit and including a first capacitor electrically connected to the coil of the inductor unit and a second capacitor electrically connectable to the first capacitor; a core body at least partially disposed within the body portion and moving along the one direction by pressure applied to one end; And a switching member disposed in the body portion and switching the electrical connection between the first capacitor and the second capacitor according to the movement of the core in the one direction; including, applied to one end of the core The capacitance of the capacitor part changes due to pressure.

A stylus pen according to another embodiment of the present invention is a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit, wherein the sensor unit is formed to extend along a first direction and has a first a plurality of first patterns whose side ends are electrically connected to the control unit; a plurality of second patterns extending in the first direction and disposed adjacent to the first pattern; a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit; and a plurality of fourth patterns extending in the second direction and disposed adjacent to the third pattern, wherein second side ends of at least some of the plurality of second patterns are electrically connected to each other, Second end portions of at least some of the plurality of fourth patterns are electrically connected to each other, and the controller applies a touch driving signal to the plurality of first patterns and a touch detection signal to the plurality of third patterns. For receiving, the control unit is for applying a stylus pen driving signal to at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first to fourth patterns, and the control unit is for applying a stylus pen driving signal to the plurality of first patterns to fourth patterns. It is for receiving stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the fourth patterns, wherein the stylus pen includes: a body portion at least partially extending along one direction; an inductor unit including a ferrite core fixedly disposed within the body unit and a coil wound in a multi-layer structure on at least a portion of the ferrite core; a capacitor portion disposed within the body portion and electrically connected to the inductor portion; a core body at least partially disposed within the body portion and moving along the one direction by pressure applied to one end; and a magnetic body disposed within the body portion and moving in the one direction in conjunction with the core body, wherein the inductance of the inductor portion changes by pressure applied to one end of the core body.

A stylus pen according to another embodiment of the present invention is a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit, wherein the sensor unit is formed to extend along a first direction and has a first a plurality of first patterns whose side ends are electrically connected to the control unit; a plurality of second patterns extending in the first direction and disposed adjacent to the first pattern; a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit; and a plurality of fourth patterns extending in the second direction and disposed adjacent to the third pattern, wherein second side ends of at least some of the plurality of second patterns are electrically connected to each other, Second end portions of at least some of the plurality of fourth patterns are electrically connected to each other, and the controller applies a touch driving signal to the plurality of first patterns and a touch detection signal to the plurality of third patterns. For receiving, the control unit is for applying a stylus pen driving signal to at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first to fourth patterns, and the control unit is for applying a stylus pen driving signal to the plurality of first patterns to fourth patterns. It is for receiving stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the fourth patterns, wherein the stylus pen includes: a body portion; an inductor unit fixedly installed in the body unit and including a ferrite core having a through hole penetrating in one direction, and a coil wound in a multi-layer manner on at least a portion of the ferrite core; A capacitor unit located within the body unit and including a capacitor electrically connected to the coil of the inductor unit and an additional capacitor electrically connectable to the capacitor; At least a portion between one end and the other end is disposed in the through hole of the ferrite core, and moves along the one direction by pressure applied to the one end; And a switching member that switches the electrical connection between the capacitor and the additional capacitor according to the pressure applied to the core body, wherein the inductor part has a separation distance from the ferrite core that changes depending on the pressure applied to the core body. Contains magnetic substances.

A stylus pen according to another embodiment of the present invention is a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit, wherein the sensor unit is formed to extend along a first direction and has a first a plurality of first patterns whose side ends are electrically connected to the control unit; and a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit, wherein the control unit sends a touch driving signal to the plurality of first patterns. for applying and receiving a touch detection signal using the plurality of third patterns, wherein the control unit provides a stylus pen driving signal using at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns. is for applying, and the control unit is for receiving stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns, and the stylus pen is configured to receive at least some pen detection signals. a body portion extending in one direction; an inductor unit including a ferrite core disposed in the body unit and a coil wound in a multi-layer structure on at least a portion of the ferrite core; a capacitor portion disposed within the body portion and including a capacitor electrically connected to the coil of the inductor portion; and a core at least partially disposed within the body and moving along the one direction by pressure applied to one end, wherein the capacitor portion includes a first electrode interlocking with the core and the first electrode in the one direction. It includes a second electrode fixedly installed on one electrode, and the capacitance of the capacitor portion changes depending on the pressure applied to one end of the core body.

A stylus pen according to another embodiment of the present invention is a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit, wherein the sensor unit is formed to extend along a first direction and has a first a plurality of first patterns whose side ends are electrically connected to the control unit; and a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit, wherein the control unit sends a touch driving signal to the plurality of first patterns. for applying and receiving a touch detection signal using the plurality of third patterns, wherein the control unit provides a stylus pen driving signal using at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns. is for applying, and the control unit is for receiving stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns, and the stylus pen is provided in the body portion. ; an inductor unit fixedly installed in the body unit and including a ferrite core having a through hole penetrating in one direction, and a coil wound in a multi-layer manner on at least a portion of the ferrite core; A capacitor unit located within the body unit and including a capacitor electrically connected to the coil of the inductor unit; and a core body in which at least a portion between one end and the other end is disposed in the through hole of the ferrite core and moves along the one direction by pressure applied to the one end, wherein the capacitor portion is located at the other end of the core body. a first electrode connected to the core body; and a second electrode fixedly installed on the first electrode, wherein the first electrode moves in the one direction due to pressure applied to one end of the core body, thereby causing a gap between the first electrode and the second electrode. The overlap area changes.

A stylus pen according to another embodiment of the present invention is a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit, wherein the sensor unit is formed to extend along a first direction and has a first a plurality of first patterns whose side ends are electrically connected to the control unit; and a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit, wherein the control unit sends a touch driving signal to the plurality of first patterns. for applying and receiving a touch detection signal using the plurality of third patterns, wherein the control unit provides a stylus pen driving signal using at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns. is for applying, and the control unit is for receiving stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns, and the stylus pen is configured to receive at least some pen detection signals. a body portion extending in one direction; an inductor unit including a ferrite core disposed in the body unit and a coil wound in a multi-layer structure on at least a portion of the ferrite core; a capacitor portion disposed within the body portion and including a capacitor electrically connected to the coil of the inductor portion; and a core at least partially disposed within the body and moving along the one direction by pressure applied to one end, wherein the ferrite core of the inductor portion is interlocked with the core, and the inductor portion is located inside the body portion. It includes a magnetic body fixedly installed on the core, and the inductance of the inductor portion changes by pressure applied to one end of the core.

A stylus pen according to another embodiment of the present invention is a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit, wherein the sensor unit is formed to extend along a first direction and has a first a plurality of first patterns whose side ends are electrically connected to the control unit; and a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit, wherein the control unit sends a touch driving signal to the plurality of first patterns. for applying and receiving a touch detection signal using the plurality of third patterns, wherein the control unit provides a stylus pen driving signal using at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns. is for applying, and the control unit is for receiving stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns, and the stylus pen is provided in the body portion. ; an inductor unit disposed within the body unit and including a ferrite core having a through hole penetrating in one direction, and a coil wound in a multi-layer structure on at least a portion of the ferrite core; A capacitor unit located within the body unit and including a capacitor electrically connected to the coil of the inductor unit; and a core body in which at least a portion between one end and the other end is disposed in the through hole of the ferrite core and moves along the one direction by pressure applied to the one end, wherein the ferrite core of the inductor portion is connected to the core body. It is combined with and interlocks with the core body, and the inductor portion includes a magnetic body fixedly installed inside the body portion, and the ferrite core moves in the one direction by the pressure applied to one end of the core body and is connected to the ferrite core. The separation distance between the magnetic materials changes.

A stylus pen according to another embodiment of the present invention is a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit, wherein the sensor unit is formed to extend along a first direction and has a first a plurality of first patterns whose side ends are electrically connected to the control unit; and a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit, wherein the control unit sends a touch driving signal to the plurality of first patterns. for applying and receiving a touch detection signal using the plurality of third patterns, wherein the control unit provides a stylus pen driving signal using at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns. is for applying, and the control unit is for receiving stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns, and the stylus pen is configured to receive at least some pen detection signals. a body portion extending in one direction; an inductor unit including a ferrite core disposed in the body unit and a coil wound in a multi-layer structure on at least a portion of the ferrite core; a capacitor unit disposed within the body unit and including a first capacitor electrically connected to the coil of the inductor unit and a second capacitor electrically connectable to the first capacitor; a core body at least partially disposed within the body portion and moving along the one direction by pressure applied to one end; And a switching member disposed in the body portion and switching the electrical connection between the first capacitor and the second capacitor according to the movement of the core in the one direction; including, applied to one end of the core The capacitance of the capacitor part changes due to pressure.

A stylus pen according to another embodiment of the present invention is a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit, wherein the sensor unit is formed to extend along a first direction and has a first a plurality of first patterns whose side ends are electrically connected to the control unit; and a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit, wherein the control unit sends a touch driving signal to the plurality of first patterns. for applying and receiving a touch detection signal using the plurality of third patterns, wherein the control unit provides a stylus pen driving signal using at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns. is for applying, and the control unit is for receiving stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns, and the stylus pen is configured to receive at least some pen detection signals. a body portion extending in one direction; an inductor unit including a ferrite core fixedly disposed within the body unit and a coil wound in a multi-layer structure on at least a portion of the ferrite core; a capacitor portion disposed within the body portion and electrically connected to the inductor portion; a core body at least partially disposed within the body portion and moving along the one direction by pressure applied to one end; and a magnetic body disposed within the body portion and moving in the one direction in conjunction with the core body, wherein the inductance of the inductor portion changes by pressure applied to one end of the core body.

A stylus pen according to another embodiment of the present invention is a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit, wherein the sensor unit is formed to extend along a first direction and has a first a plurality of first patterns whose side ends are electrically connected to the control unit; and a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit, wherein the control unit sends a touch driving signal to the plurality of first patterns. for applying and receiving a touch detection signal using the plurality of third patterns, wherein the control unit provides a stylus pen driving signal using at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns. is for applying, and the control unit is for receiving stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns, and the stylus pen is provided in the body portion. ; an inductor unit fixedly installed in the body unit and including a ferrite core having a through hole penetrating in one direction, and a coil wound in a multi-layer manner on at least a portion of the ferrite core; A capacitor unit located within the body unit and including a capacitor electrically connected to the coil of the inductor unit and an additional capacitor electrically connectable to the capacitor; At least a portion between one end and the other end is disposed in the through hole of the ferrite core, and moves along the one direction by pressure applied to the one end; And a switching member that switches the electrical connection between the capacitor and the additional capacitor according to the pressure applied to the core body, wherein the inductor part has a separation distance from the ferrite core that changes depending on the pressure applied to the core body. Contains magnetic substances.

According to at least one of the embodiments of the present disclosure, there is an advantage in that a sufficient output signal can be generated even with a small diameter by providing an optimal structure of a resonance circuit of a stylus pen.

According to at least one of the embodiments of the present disclosure, there is an advantage of providing a stylus pen that is robust against external factors.

Using the touch input device according to the embodiment of the present invention has the advantage of detecting the touch position, driving the stylus pen, and detecting the position of the stylus pen.

Additionally, there is an advantage in solving the problem that the output voltage of the sensing circuit unit varies depending on the position of the stylus pen.

Additionally, when the screen of the touch input device is enlarged to the size of the tablet PC screen, there is an advantage in that the operating frequency bandwidth of the touch driving signal and the pen driving signal can be expanded.

Additionally, when the screen of the touch input device is enlarged to the size of the tablet PC screen, there is an advantage in that attenuation of the pen detection signal can be alleviated.

Additionally, there is an advantage of lowering the manufacturing cost of the touch input device.

Additionally, it has the advantage of being able to provide a thinner and smaller form factor.

Additionally, there is an advantage of improving the signal-noise-ratio (SNR) of the signal output from the stylus pen.

Additionally, there is an advantage of improving the reception sensitivity of touch input.

Additionally, there is an advantage of being able to calculate a more accurate touch position.

Additionally, it has the advantage of being able to perform palm rejection.

In addition, there is an advantage of lowering the manufacturing cost of a stylus pen capable of detecting pen pressure.

Additionally, it has the advantage of being able to precisely measure pen pressure using a stylus pen.

The effect of the present invention is not limited to the above-described effects, and better effects or unique effects may be exhibited in each embodiment in the [modes for carrying out the invention] described later.

Figures 1 (a) and (b) are diagrams showing stylus pens according to embodiments.

Figure 2 is a diagram specifically showing the inductor portion of the stylus pen.

Figure 3 is a diagram showing inductance and Q value according to frequency change.

Figures 4 and 5 are views showing enamel lines and Ritz lines, respectively.

Figure 6 is a diagram showing a multi-layer winding method.

Figures 7 to 9 are graphs showing comparative experiment results.

FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of the resonance circuit unit 12 of the stylus pen shown in FIGS. 1 (a) and 1 (b).

Figure 11 is a diagram showing a partial structure of the resonance circuit portion of the stylus pen according to the first aspect.

Figure 12 is a diagram showing a partial structure of the resonance circuit portion of the stylus pen according to the second aspect.

Figure 13 is a diagram showing a partial structure of the resonance circuit portion of the stylus pen according to the third aspect.

Figure 14 is a diagram showing a partial structure of the resonance circuit portion of the stylus pen according to the fourth aspect.

Figure 15 is a graph showing the change in capacitance value of the stylus pen according to the fourth aspect.

Figure 16 is a diagram showing a partial structure of the resonance circuit portion of the stylus pen according to the fifth aspect.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the structure of the dielectric of FIG. 16.

Figure 18 is a graph showing the change in capacitance value of the stylus pen according to the fifth aspect.

Figure 19 is a diagram showing a partial structure of the resonance circuit portion of the stylus pen according to the sixth aspect.

FIG. 20 is a graph showing the change in capacitance value of the stylus pen according to the sixth aspect shown in FIG. 19.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing another embodiment of the resonance circuit unit 12 of the stylus pen shown in FIGS. 1 (a) and (b).

Figure 22 is a diagram showing a partial structure of the resonance circuit portion of the stylus pen according to the first aspect.

Figure 23 is a graph showing the change in inductance value of the stylus pen according to the first aspect.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the structure of the magnetic material of FIG. 22.

Figure 25 is a diagram showing a partial structure of the resonance circuit portion of the stylus pen according to the second aspect.

Figure 26 is a diagram showing a partial structure of the resonance circuit portion of the stylus pen according to the third aspect.

Figure 27 is a graph showing the change in inductance value of the stylus pen according to the third aspect.

Figure 28 is a diagram showing a partial structure of the resonance circuit portion of the stylus pen according to the fourth aspect.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing another embodiment of the resonance circuit unit 12 of the stylus pen shown in FIGS. 1 (a) and (b).

FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the stylus pen of FIG. 29 according to pen pressure.

FIG. 31 is a diagram schematically showing an equivalent circuit of the resonance circuit portion of the stylus pen of FIG. 29.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing another embodiment of the resonance circuit unit 12 of the stylus pen shown in FIGS. 1 (a) and (b).

FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the stylus pen of FIG. 32 according to pen pressure.

FIG. 34 is a diagram schematically showing an equivalent circuit of the resonance circuit portion of the stylus pen of FIG. 32.

Figure 35 is a diagram showing another embodiment of the resonance circuit unit 12 of the stylus pen shown in Figures 1 (a) and (b).

FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the stylus pen of FIG. 35 according to pen pressure.

FIG. 37 is a diagram schematically showing an equivalent circuit of the resonance circuit portion of the stylus pen of FIG. 35.

Figure 38 is a graph illustrating the change in LC value according to pen pressure of the stylus pen of Figure 35 as an example.

Figure 39 is a graph showing the frequency response characteristics of the stylus pen of Figure 35 as an example.

Figure 40 schematically shows a stylus pen 10f according to the fourth embodiment.

Figure 41 schematically shows a stylus pen 10f according to the fifth embodiment.

Figure 42 schematically shows a stylus pen 10f according to the sixth embodiment.

Figure 43 schematically shows a stylus pen 10f according to the seventh embodiment.

Figure 44 schematically shows a stylus pen 10f according to the eighth embodiment.

Figure 45 schematically shows a stylus pen 10f according to the ninth embodiment.

Figure 46a is a conceptual diagram showing a pen and touch input system including a stylus pen and a touch input device.

FIG. 46B is a diagram for explaining uplink and downlink in the pen and touch input system shown in FIG. 46A.

Figure 46c is a diagram to explain the gap between the + driving channel and - driving channel in the uplink.

Figure 46d is a conceptual diagram showing another embodiment of a pen and touch input system including a stylus pen and a touch input device.

Figure 47a is a diagram schematically showing a signal transmission operation between a stylus pen and a touch input device.

FIG. 47B is a diagram schematically showing a partial stack structure of the touch input device of FIG. 46A.

FIGS. 47C and 47D are diagrams schematically showing a partial stack structure of the touch input device of FIG. 46D.

Figure 48 is a block diagram schematically showing a touch input device.

Figure 49 is a schematic diagram to explain that the output voltage (Vout) of CVA (Capacitor Voltage Amplitude) varies depending on the position of the stylus pen 10 on a conventional flexible display panel.

Figure 50 is a diagram to explain through current sensing that the output voltages (Vout1, Vout2) of the CVA are different depending on the position of the pen 10 in Figure 46b.

Figure 51 is a diagram to explain through voltage sensing that the output voltages (Vout1, Vout2) of the CVA are different depending on the position of the pen 10 in Figure 46b.

Figure 52 is a schematic configuration diagram of the sensor unit 100 of the touch input device according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 53 is a schematic configuration diagram of an example of the sensor unit 100 shown in FIG. 52.

FIG. 54 is a schematic configuration diagram of another example of the sensor unit 100 shown in FIG. 52.

Figure 55 is a schematic configuration diagram of the sensor unit 100' of the touch input device according to the second embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 56 is a schematic configuration diagram of an example of the sensor unit 100' shown in FIG. 55.

FIG. 57 is a schematic configuration diagram of another example of the sensor unit 100' shown in FIG. 55.

FIG. 58 is a schematic configuration diagram of another example of the sensor unit 100' shown in FIG. 55.

FIG. 59 is a configuration diagram schematically showing another example of the sensor unit 100' shown in FIG. 55.

FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating the touch input device shown in FIG. 56.

FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating a method by which the control unit 300 of FIG. 60 applies a pen driving signal for driving a stylus pen to a plurality of second patterns 102A.

Figures 62 (a) to (f) are diagrams for schematically explaining the operation principle of the stylus sensing mode of the touch input device of Figure 60.

FIG. 63 is a detailed diagram of the touch input device shown in FIG. 57.

FIG. 64 is a detailed diagram of the touch input device shown in FIG. 58.

FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating the touch input device shown in FIG. 59.

Figure 66 is a diagram schematically showing a sensor unit according to a modified example that can replace the sensor unit according to various embodiments described above.

Figure 67 is a modified example of the sensor unit shown in Figure 66.

Figure 68 is a modified example of the sensor unit according to the various embodiments described above.

Figure 69 is a modified example of the sensor unit according to various embodiments described above.

Figure 70 is a modified example of the sensor unit according to the various embodiments described above.

Figure 71 is a modified example of the sensor unit according to the various embodiments described above.

Figure 72 is a modified example of the sensor unit according to various embodiments described above.

Figure 73 is a modified example of the sensor unit according to various embodiments described above.

Figure 74 is a modified example of the sensor unit according to the various embodiments described above.

Figure 75 is a modified example of the sensor unit according to various embodiments described above.

FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining a first modified example of the fifth pattern 105 shown in FIG. 69.

Figure 77 is a modified example of Figure 76.

FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the fifth pattern 105' shown in FIG. 76.

Figure 79 is a modified example of Figure 78.

FIGS. 80 and 81 are diagrams for explaining modified examples of the third pattern 103 and the fourth pattern 104 in the sensor unit as shown in FIG. 70 or 71.

Figure 82 is a diagram schematically showing a part of a touch input device according to another embodiment.

Figure 83 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of electrodes (or patterns) and traces of a touch unit according to an embodiment.

Figure 84 is a diagram showing another example of the arrangement of electrodes (or patterns) and traces of the touch unit according to an embodiment.

Figure 85 is a diagram showing a case where a stylus pen is located on the sensor unit of the touch unit according to an embodiment.

FIG. 86 is a graph showing a method of measuring a signal of a touch unit according to the embodiments shown in FIGS. 84 and 85.

Figures 87 and 88 are graphs showing detection signals by a stylus pen according to one embodiment.

Figures 89 and 90 are graphs showing detection signals by a stylus pen according to another embodiment.

Figure 91 is a diagram showing a case where a stylus pen is located on a sensor unit of a touch unit according to an embodiment.

Figures 92 and 93 are graphs showing detection signals by a stylus pen according to one embodiment.

Figures 94 and 95 are graphs showing detection signals by a stylus pen according to another embodiment.

Figure 96 is a block diagram schematically showing a touch input device.

Figure 97 is a diagram schematically showing a part of a touch unit according to an embodiment.

Figure 98 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of electrodes (or patterns) and traces of a touch unit according to another embodiment.

Figure 99 is a schematic diagram illustrating a method of driving a stylus pen in the touch input device 2 or the stylus driving device according to the present invention.

Figure 100 is a diagram specifically explaining a method of activating a stylus pen in the touch input device 2 or the stylus driving device according to the present invention.

Figure 101 is a schematic diagram for explaining a method of detecting a stylus 2 signal in the touch input device 2 according to the present invention.

102 to 104 are diagrams for specifically explaining a method of detecting a signal from a stylus pen in the touch input device 2 according to an embodiment of the present invention.

Figure 105 shows various wiring structures of second electrodes in a touch input device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

Figures 106 and 107 show the experimental process and results for verifying the signal detection ability of a stylus using a touch input device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

Figure 108 is a block diagram showing the touch unit and host.

Figure 109 is a diagram showing an example of touch data provided from the touch unit to the host.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS Various embodiments of this document are described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. However, this is not intended to limit the technology described in this document to specific embodiments, and should be understood to include various modifications, equivalents, and/or alternatives to the embodiments of this document. do. In connection with the description of the drawings, similar reference numerals may be used for similar components.

In addition, the size and thickness of each component shown in the drawings are arbitrarily shown for convenience of explanation, so the present invention is not necessarily limited to what is shown. In the drawing, the thickness is enlarged to clearly express various layers and areas. And in the drawings, for convenience of explanation, the thicknesses of some layers and regions are exaggerated.

Additionally, when a part of a layer, membrane, region, plate, etc. is said to be “on” or “on” another part, this includes not only cases where it is “directly above” another part, but also cases where there is another part in between. . Conversely, when a part is said to be “right on top” of another part, it means that there is no other part in between. In addition, being “on” or “on” a reference part means being located above or below the reference part, and does not necessarily mean being located “above” or “on” the direction opposite to gravity. .

In this document, expressions such as “have,” “may have,” “includes,” or “may include” refer to the presence of the corresponding feature (e.g., a numerical value, function, operation, or component such as a part). , and does not rule out the existence of additional features.

In this document, expressions such as “A or B,” “at least one of A or/and B,” or “one or more of A or/and B” may include all possible combinations of the items listed together. . For example, “A or B”, “at least one of A and B”, or “at least one of A or B” (1) includes at least one A, (2) includes at least one B, or (3) it may refer to all cases including both at least one A and at least one B.

As used herein, expressions such as "first", "second", "first", or "second" may describe various elements, in any order and/or importance, and may refer to one element as another. It is only used to distinguish from components and does not limit the components. For example, a first user device and a second user device may represent different user devices regardless of order or importance. For example, a first component may be renamed a second component without departing from the scope of rights described in this document, and similarly, the second component may also be renamed to the first component.

A component (e.g., a first component) is “(operatively or communicatively) coupled with/to” another component (e.g., a second component). When referred to as “connected to,” it should be understood that a component may be directly connected to another component or may be connected through another component (e.g., a third component). On the other hand, when a component (e.g., a first component) is said to be "directly connected" or "directly connected" to another component (e.g., a second component), It can be understood that no other components (e.g., third components) exist between the elements.

The expression “configured to” used in this document may mean, for example, “suitable for,” “having the capacity to,” or “having the capacity to.” It can be used interchangeably with ", "designed to," "adapted to," "made to," or "capable of." The term “configured (or set to)” may not necessarily mean “specifically designed to” in hardware. Instead, in some contexts, the expression “a device configured to” may mean that the device is “capable of” working with other devices or components. For example, the phrase "processor configured (or set) to perform A, B, and C" refers to a processor dedicated to performing the operations (e.g., an embedded processor), or by executing one or more software programs stored on a memory device. , may refer to a general-purpose processor (e.g., CPU or application processor) capable of performing the corresponding operations.

Terms used in this document are merely used to describe specific embodiments and may not be intended to limit the scope of other embodiments. Singular expressions may include plural expressions, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. Terms used herein, including technical or scientific terms, may have the same meaning as commonly understood by a person of ordinary skill in the technical field described in this document. Among the terms used in this document, terms defined in general dictionaries may be interpreted to have the same or similar meaning as the meaning they have in the context of related technology, and unless clearly defined in this document, have an ideal or excessively formal meaning. It is not interpreted as In some cases, even terms defined in this document cannot be interpreted to exclude embodiments of this document.

Touch input devices according to various embodiments of the present document include, for example, smart phones, tablet personal computers, mobile phones, video phones, e-book readers, and laptops. It may include at least one of a laptop personal computer (PC), a netbook computer, a mobile medical device, a camera, or a wearable device. According to various embodiments, the wearable device may be an accessory (e.g., a watch, ring, bracelet, anklet, necklace, glasses, contact lenses, or a head-mounted-device (HMD)), or integrated into a fabric or garment ( It may include at least one of a body-attached type (e.g., an electronic garment), a body-attachable type (e.g., a skin pad or a tattoo), or a bioimplantable type (e.g., an implantable circuit).

Hereinafter, a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the necessary drawings. After describing the stylus pen according to an embodiment of the present invention, a touch input device that can operate with the stylus pen will be described.

Figures 1 (a) and (b) are diagrams showing a stylus pen according to various embodiments of the present invention.

The stylus pens of Figures 1 (a) and (b) commonly include a resonance circuit portion 12 within a housing.

The resonance circuit unit 12 is an LC resonance circuit and can resonate with a driving signal output from the touch screen 20 of a touch input device, which will be described later. The driving signal may include a signal (eg, a sine wave, a square wave, etc.) having a frequency corresponding to the resonance frequency of the resonance circuit unit 12. For resonance, the resonance frequency of the resonance circuit unit 12 and the frequency of the driving signal must be the same or very similar. The resonance frequency of the stylus pens 10a and 10b depends on the design value of the resonance circuit portion 12 of the stylus pens 10a and 10b. When the sensor unit 21 in (b) of FIG. or the loop coil 264 in FIG. (c), which will be described later, generates an electromagnetic field due to a driving signal, the resonance circuit unit 12 of the stylus pens 10a and 10b generates a magnetic field. It resonates using the signal received through changes in .

When the inductance of the inductor unit 14 and/or the capacitance of the capacitor unit 13 included in the resonance circuit unit 12 change, the resonance frequency of the resonance circuit unit 12 changes. That is, when pen pressure is applied to the stylus pen 10, the resonance frequency of the resonance circuit unit 12 changes, so the frequency of the electromagnetic field (electromagnetic force) output from the stylus pen 10 changes. Then, the touch controller 262, which will be described later, can detect pen pressure by calculating the amount of change in the inductance and/or capacitance of the resonance circuit unit 12 from the changed frequency of electromagnetic force.

Elements of the stylus pens 10a and 10b may be accommodated in the housing. The housing may have a cylinder shape, a polygonal pillar shape, a pillar shape with at least a portion of the curved surface, an entasis shape, a frustum of pyramid shape, a circular truncated cone shape, etc., but is not limited to the shape. Since the housing is empty inside, it can accommodate elements of the stylus pens 10a and 10b, such as the resonance circuit unit 12, therein. Such housing may be made of non-conductive material. The housing may also be referred to as the body portion.

As shown in (a) of FIG. 1, the EMR type stylus pen 10a includes a resonance circuit unit 12. The resonance circuit unit 12 includes an inductor unit 14 and a capacitor unit 13. The inductor unit 14 includes a ferrite core 115 and a coil 116 wound on the outer surface of the ferrite core 115.

The EMR type stylus pen 10a may further include a tip 11a. The tip 11a is the end of the stylus pen 10a, and may be arranged to penetrate the ferrite core 115 as shown in (a) of FIG. 1, or may protrude from the ferrite core 115. The tip 11a may be non-conductive or may be composed of an electrode core made of a conductor, for example, a hard resin mixed with a conductive metal or conductive powder. Here, the tip 11a does not need to be electrically connected to the resonance circuit unit 12.

The ferrite core 115 may be, for example, a cylindrical ferrite material. The ferrite core 115 may be formed with an axial through hole having a predetermined diameter (for example, 1 mm) through which the tip 11a is inserted. In addition, the ferrite core 115 may be formed in the form of a cylinder, a polygonal pillar, a pillar with at least a portion of the curved surface, a double-sided pillar shape, a truncated pyramid shape, a truncated cone, a toroid, a ring shape, etc.

The coil 116 may be wound over the entire length of the ferrite core 115 in the axial direction, or may be wound over a portion of the length. The coil 116 is electrically connected to the capacitor unit 13.

The capacitor unit 13 may include a plurality of capacitors connected in parallel. Each capacitor on the printed board may have a different capacitance and may be trimmed during the manufacturing process.

As shown in (b) of FIG. 1, the electrically coupled resonance (ECR) type stylus pen 10b includes a conductive tip 11b and a resonance circuit unit 12. The resonance circuit unit 12 includes an inductor unit 14 and a capacitor unit 13 and may be grounded. The inductor unit 14 includes a ferrite core 115 and a coil 116 wound on the outer surface of the ferrite core 115.

The conductive tip 11b may be formed entirely or at least in part of a conductive material (eg, metal, conductive rubber, conductive fabric, conductive silicon, etc.), but is not limited thereto.

The coil 116 may be wound over the entire length of the ferrite core 115 in the axial direction, or may be wound over a portion of the length. The coil 116 is electrically connected to the capacitor unit 13.

The capacitor unit 13 may include a plurality of capacitors connected in parallel. Each capacitor on the printed board may have a different capacitance and may be trimmed during the manufacturing process.

FIG. 2 is a conceptual diagram specifically illustrating an example of an inductor portion of the stylus pen shown in FIGS. 1 (a) and (b).

Referring to FIG. 2, the inductor unit 14 includes a ferrite core 115 and a coil 116 wound around the ferrite core 115.

At this time, the inductance of the inductor unit 14 is determined by the following <Equation 1>.

As can be seen from Equation 1, the inductance (L) is proportional to the permeability of the ferrite core 115, the cross-sectional area of the coil 116, and the square of the number of turns, and is proportional to the winding length of the coil 116. It is inversely proportional.

The design of the inductor unit 14 in the resonance circuit unit 12 accommodated in the stylus pen shown in Figures 2 (a) and (b) is very important. In particular, in the design of the inductor unit 14, as shown in FIG. 3, the inductance (L) and Q value are very important parameters. Here, the Q value is a quantity representing the coil characteristics as a resonance circuit element, and is given as Q=2πfL/R. Here, L and R are the inductance and resistance of the coil, respectively, and f is the frequency. As a coil with a larger Q value is used, sharper resonance characteristics can be obtained.

In the design of the stylus pen shown in Figures 2 (a) and (b), L must have a sufficiently large self-resonance frequency for the frequency to be used, and the Q value must be the maximum at the frequency to be used. It is desirable to have a value. To satisfy this, the material of the ferrite core, type of coil wire, and winding scheme must be optimized. Additionally, a method is needed to obtain a high output signal while maintaining the diameter of a thin pen.

In the following embodiments, a design method for the most optimized stylus pen among multiple ferrite core materials, coil wire types, and winding schemes will be described.

(1) Material of ferrite core

Manganese (Mn) and nickel (Ni) were used as materials for the ferrite core used in this embodiment.

(2)　Wire type

Enameled wire and Litz wire were used as coil wire types used in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 4, the enamel wire 100 is a wire made by coating the surface of a copper wire 101 with insulating enamel 102 and heating it to a high temperature, and is used in windings of electrical devices, communication devices, and electrical instruments, etc. Used for wiring. In this embodiment, an enamel wire with a total thickness (T) of 0.2 mm, a wire diameter (Φ) of 0.18 mm, and a coating thickness (t) of 0.01 mm was used.

As shown in Figure 5, the LITZ wire 200 is made by twisting several strands of thin insulated wire (100, for example, enameled wire) with a diameter of about 0.1 mm into one line, and nylon, etc. It is a special insulated wire with an insulating coating (201). The litz wire 200 can reduce skin effect by increasing its surface area, and is used in coils of high-frequency circuits, etc.

In this embodiment, a Litz wire with a total thickness (T) of 0.2 mm, a wire diameter (Φ) of 0.06 mm, and a covering thickness (t) of 0.007 mm was used.

(3)　Winding method

In an embodiment of the present invention, a winding method with a multi-layer winding structure was used to obtain a sufficient inductance value (i.e., a sufficient number of turns) in the limited space of the stylus pen. Specifically, two types of multi-layer winding methods were used as shown in Figures 6 (A) and (B).

The winding method shown in (A) of FIG. 6 is the simplest winding method and is a sequential layer winding scheme in which the layer immediately above is wound once the winding of the lower layer is completed. At this time, the method (A) in FIG. 6 is a method in which the winding of the layer immediately above begins at the point where the winding of the previous layer ends, and hereinafter, this is referred to as the U-type winding method.

The winding method shown in (B) of FIG. 6 is an alternate layer winding scheme in which adjacent winding layers are wound alternately, and the windings of adjacent layers are wound obliquely in a zigzag shape. Hereinafter, this is referred to as the zigzag type winding method. Specifically, after sequentially winding the second layer winding over the first layer winding, the third layer winding is wound between the first layer winding and the second layer winding, and the fourth layer winding is wound over the second layer winding. After winding the winding, the 5th layer winding is wound between the 2nd layer winding and the 4th layer winding. This zigzag type winding method has the advantage of being able to minimize the voltage difference between windings of adjacent layers, thereby reducing winding self-capacitance. At this time, winding self-capacitance, a type of parasitic capacitance, is a parameter representing the electric field energy stored in the winding.

Comparative experiment 1 (Comparison of properties for each material)

The Q value was measured by changing the ferrite core material to manganese, nickel, and magnesium while the coil wire was wound using an enameled wire or U-type winding method.

As a result of the measurement, there was little difference in the Q value characteristics of each core material, and the measured Q value was also insufficient to implement into a product.

Comparative experiment 2 (Comparison of characteristics by winding type)

The Q value was measured for inductor 1 and inductor 2, which were manufactured using the ferrite core material as manganese (Mn) and U-type winding method, and the coil wire types were enamel wire and Litz wire, respectively.

Figure 7 is a diagram showing the Q values of inductor 1 and inductor 2 measured while changing the frequency using an E4980A precision LCR meter from KEYSIGHT TECHNOGIES.

In Figure 7, a is a waveform showing the change in Q value with respect to the frequency of inductor 1 (manganese core/enamel wire/U type winding method), and b is the frequency of inductor 2 (manganese core/litz wire/U type winding method). This is a waveform that shows the change in Q value for .

In inductor 2 made of Litz wire, the Q value shows almost the maximum at a frequency around 400 kHz (frequency f1), and in inductor 1 made of enameled wire, the Q value shows almost the maximum at a frequency around 150 kHz (frequency f2).

As a result of comparing a and b in FIG. 7, it can be seen that the maximum Q value of inductor 2 is approximately 1.5 times higher than the maximum Q value of inductor 1. Therefore, it can be seen that the Litz wire is superior to the enamel wire as an inductor coil forming the resonance circuit of the stylus pen.

However, the maximum Q value of inductor 2 measured in comparative experiment 2 was only about half of the target value (Qtarget) required for commercialization.

Comparative experiment 3 (Comparison of characteristics by winding method)

The Q values were measured for inductors 3 to 5 manufactured by changing the wire type to enamel wire and Litz wire and the winding method to U type and zigzag type, with the ferrite core made of manganese (Mn).

Figure 8 is a diagram showing the Q values of inductors 3 to 5 measured while changing the frequency using an E4980A precision LCR meter from KEYSIGHT TECHNOGIES.

In Figure 8, a is a waveform showing the change in Q value with respect to the frequency of inductor 3 (manganese core/enamel wire/U type winding method), and b is the frequency of inductor 4 (manganese core/enamel wire/zigzag type winding method). This is a waveform showing the change in Q value for , and c is a waveform showing the change in Q value for the frequency of inductor 5 (manganese core/Litz wire/zigzag type winding type).

As can be seen from the c waveform in FIG. 8, in inductor 5 manufactured using the Litz wire/zigzag winding method, the Q value is almost at its maximum at a frequency around 300 kHz (frequency f3). In inductor 4 manufactured using the enameled wire/zizzag winding method and inductor 3 manufactured using the enameled wire/U-type winding method, the Q value reaches its maximum at a frequency around 150 kHz (frequency f2).

Additionally, as a result of comparing a, b, and c in Figure 8, it can be seen that the maximum Q value of inductor 5 is almost 1.5 times higher than the maximum Q value of inductor 4, and is more than twice higher than the maximum Q value of inductor 3. . Therefore, it can be seen that the zigzag type winding method of the inductor forming the resonance circuit of the stylus pen is superior to the U type winding method.

However, it was only about 3/4 of the target value (Qtarget) required for commercialization of inductor 5 (manganese core/Litz wire/zigzag type winding method) measured in comparative experiment 2.

Comparative experiment 4 (Comparison of characteristics by core material)

In this embodiment, manganese and nickel were used as materials for the ferrite core, and the permeability of nickel is usually known to be 200-300, and the permeability of manganese is known to be 3000-5000.

Since the manganese used in this embodiment has a permeability approximately 15 times higher than that of nickel, assuming that the cross-sectional area and length of the coil are the same, the number of turns of manganese must be reduced by approximately 4 times that of nickel to obtain the same inductance value. There are advantages to this. Therefore, looking only from the perspective of the number of turns, it can be seen that it is more effective to use manganese rather than nickel.

Meanwhile, since the inductor unit 14 has a complex structure including a coil wound around the core, parasitic capacitance is additionally formed. Since the Q value decreases due to this parasitic capacitance, there is a problem of reducing the amplitude of the resonance signal.

The parasitic capacitance formed in the inductor unit 14 may occur between the wound coils and between the core and the coil. As described above, the parasitic capacitance between the wound coils can be reduced by adopting a zigzag type winding method. .

Meanwhile, in this embodiment, in order to reduce the parasitic capacitance between the core and the coil, a core material with a lower dielectric constant than manganese was tested, and as a result of the test, it was confirmed that the nickel core was the optimal material for the ferrite core.

An important physical characteristic of manganese and nickel, which are mainly used as ferrite core devices, is permeability, which has a significant effect on the inductance value as shown in Equation 1. However, in manganese and nickel as ferrite elements, permittivity is a physical property of little interest, and in fact, in the case of nickel, there is no relevant information even in the data sheet provided by the manufacturer.

In this embodiment, in order to check the permittivity of manganese and nickel, the permittivity of manganese and nickel was measured using an E4980A precision LCR meter from KEYSIGHT TECHNOGIES, and the measurement results are shown in Table 1 below.

Measurement 1 and Measurement 2 were measured using the same E4980A precision LCR meter from KEYSIGHT TECHNOGIES, and Measurement 1 represents the dielectric constant automatically calculated by the measurement software. According to Measurement 1, it can be seen that the dielectric constant of manganese is 2400, but the dielectric constant of nickel is not measured.

Measurement 2 is a method of calculating the dielectric constant by measuring the capacitance, area, and distance between the ferrite cores. According to Measurement 2, the dielectric constant of manganese was measured to be 8300 and that of nickel was measured to be 2.

There is a large difference in the dielectric constant results between Measurement 1 and Measurement 2, and in particular, in the case of Measurement 2, it was confirmed that there was a significant error depending on capacitance, area, distance, etc. However, as a result of Measurement 1 and Measurement 2, it can be seen that the dielectric constant of nickel is at least 1/1000 smaller than that of manganese.

In Comparative Experiment 4, the Q value was measured for inductors 6 and 7, which were manufactured by changing the winding method to U type and zigzag type, with the ferrite core material being nickel and the wire type being Litz wire.

Figure 9 is a diagram showing the Q values of inductor 6 and inductor 7 measured while changing the frequency using an E4980A precision LCR meter from KEYSIGHT TECHNOGIES.

In Figure 9, a is a waveform showing the change in Q value with respect to the frequency of inductor 6 (nickel core/Litz wire/U type winding method), and b is the frequency of inductor 7 (nickel core/Litz wire/zigzag type winding method). This is a waveform that shows the change in Q value for .

As can be seen from the waveform b in FIG. 9, in inductor 7 manufactured using the nickel core/Litz wire/zigzag winding method, the Q value is almost at its maximum at a frequency around 400 kHz (frequency f5). In inductor 6 manufactured using the nickel core/Litz wire/U type winding method, the Q value is almost at its maximum at a frequency around 200 kHz (frequency f6). As a result of comparing a and b in Figure 11, it can be seen that the maximum Q value of inductor 7 is almost twice higher than the maximum Q value of inductor 6.

Meanwhile, it was found that the maximum Q value of inductor 7 (nickel core/Litz wire/zigzag type winding method) measured in comparative experiment 4 almost reached the target value (Qtarget) required for commercialization.

In comparative experiments 1 to 4 described above, the Q value was tested by manufacturing inductors by changing the combination of ferrite core material, coil wire type, and winding scheme, and the test results showed that nickel core, Litz wire, and zigzag It was found that the highest Q value was obtained when the inductor part of the capacitive resonance stylus pen was designed using a type of winding method. And, it was found that the maximum Q value of the inductor manufactured by this combination reached the target value (Qtarget) for commercialization.

Meanwhile, in this embodiment, a nickel core was used as a ferrite core and a Litz wire was used as a wire type of the core. However, in addition to the nickel core, a material with a dielectric constant of 1000 or less was used as the ferrite core, and in addition to the Litz wire, one coil was made of two or more wires. Similar results may be obtained when using a bundle of wire wrapped around an insulated wire (strand).

FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of the resonance circuit unit 12 of the stylus pen shown in FIGS. 1 (a) and 1 (b).

As shown in FIG. 10, the inductor unit 14 includes a coil 116 wound around a ferrite core 115, and the capacitor unit 13 includes a first electrode 117, a second electrode 118, and genome (119). The coil 116 of the inductor unit 14 and the electrodes 117 and 118 of the capacitor unit 13 are electrically connected.

The core body 11 is inserted into the through hole of the ferrite core 115. One end of the core body 11 functions as a pen tip of the stylus pen 10, and the first electrode 117 of the capacitor unit 13 may be located at the other end of the core body 11. The first electrode 117 may move in the z-axis direction due to pressure of the core body 11 in the z-axis direction.

The second electrode 118 and the dielectric 119 are located on the z-axis direction movement path of the first electrode 117. That is, the first electrode 117, the second electrode 118, and the dielectric 119 are positioned so that capacitance changes as the first electrode 117 moves. In this drawing, the first electrode 117 is shown to have a cylindrical shape, and the second electrode 118 and the dielectric 119 are shown to have a ring shape. However, the first electrode 117, the second electrode 118 , and the shape of the dielectric 119 is not limited thereto. In addition, the first electrode 117, the second electrode 118, and the dielectric 119 may be formed in the form of a cylinder, a polygonal pillar, a pillar with at least a portion of the curved surface, a hollow pillar, a truncated pyramid, a truncated cone, a toroid, etc. can be formed.

Although not shown in the drawing, the first electrode 117 may not be disposed at the other end of the core 11, but may be disposed at a position where it can interoperate with the core 11. That is, the first electrode 117 may move according to the movement of the core body 11. Alternatively, at least a portion of the first electrode 117 may be interlocked with the core body 11.

A dielectric 119 is located inside the second electrode 118, and a through hole H1 through which the first electrode 117 can move may be located inside the dielectric 119. The cylindrical first electrode 117 may form capacitance with the second electrode 118 and the dielectric 119 by moving in the z-axis direction through the through hole H1.

Here, the thickness of the dielectric 119 may be constant, but in the case of the stylus pen 10 according to the fifth aspect, which will be described later, the dielectric 119 may have various thicknesses or shapes.

At this time, the capacitance can be calculated as in Equation 2 below.

Here, C is the capacitance, A is the area where the first electrode 117 and the second electrode 118 overlap, d is the distance between the electrode 117 and the second electrode 118, and ε is the dielectric 119. is the dielectric constant of

As the pressure applied to one end of the core body 11 increases, the first electrode 117 moves in the z-axis direction. As the first electrode 117 moves in the z-axis direction, the area of the area where the second electrode 118 and the first electrode 117 overlap increases. Then, the capacitance (C) value of the capacitor unit 13 increases.

Hereinafter, various modifications of the stylus pen according to an embodiment of the present invention shown in FIG. 10 will be described in detail.

Figure 11 is a diagram showing a partial structure of the resonance circuit portion of the stylus pen according to the first aspect.

In FIG. 11 , the side of the resonance circuit unit 12 is shown, and a cross section of the ring-shaped second electrode 118 and the dielectric 119 along the xz plane is shown.

As shown in (a) of FIG. 11, the support member 120 is located at the other end of the core body 11. An elastic member 121 is positioned between the support member 120, the second electrode 118, and the dielectric 119. The elastic member 121 is supported by the support member 120.

As shown in (b) of FIG. 11, as the core body 11 moves in the z-axis direction, the support member 120 may also move in the z-axis direction. The elastic member 121 may be compressed in the z-axis direction as the support member 120 moves in the z-axis direction. As the first electrode 117 moves along the length L1 in the z-axis direction, the second electrode 118 and the first electrode 117 overlap.

At this time, the direction of the elastic force of the elastic member 121 is opposite to the z-axis. Therefore, when the pressure applied to the core body 11 is removed, the elastic member 121 is restored by elastic force as shown in (a) of FIG. 75.

Figure 12 is a diagram showing a partial structure of the resonance circuit portion of the stylus pen according to the second aspect.

In FIG. 12, the side of the resonance circuit unit 12 is shown, and a cross section of the ring-shaped second electrode 118 and the dielectric 119 along the xz plane is shown.

As shown in (a) of FIG. 12, the elastic member 121 is located between the first electrode 117 and the support member 120. The support member 120 is fixed to the housing. The elastic member 121 is supported by the support member 120. Here, the housing may also be referred to as a body portion.

As shown in (b) of FIG. 12, the elastic member 121 may be compressed in the z-axis direction as the core body 11 moves in the z-axis direction. As the first electrode 117 moves along the length L1 in the z-axis direction, the second electrode 118 and the first electrode 117 overlap.

At this time, the direction of the elastic force of the elastic member 121 is opposite to the z-axis. Therefore, when the pressure applied to the core body 11 is removed, the elastic member 121 is restored by elastic force as shown in (a) of FIG. 12.

Figure 13 is a diagram showing a partial structure of the resonance circuit portion of the stylus pen according to the third aspect.

In FIG. 13 , the side of the resonance circuit unit 12 is shown, and a cross section of the cylindrical second electrode 118 and the dielectric 119 along the xz plane is shown.

The second electrode 118 may have a cylindrical shape with a cavity inside. A dielectric 119 may be located on the inner wall of the cavity.

As shown in (a) of FIG. 13, the support member 120 is located at the other end of the core body 11. An elastic member 121 is positioned between the support member 120, the second electrode 118, and the dielectric 119. The elastic member 121 is supported by the support member 120.

As shown in (b) of FIG. 13, as the core body 11 moves in the z-axis direction, the support member 120 may also move in the z-axis direction. The elastic member 121 may be compressed in the z-axis direction as the support member 120 moves in the z-axis direction. As the first electrode 117 moves along the length L1 in the z-axis direction, the second electrode 118 and the first electrode 117 overlap. At this time, capacitance is also formed by the first electrode 117, the second electrode 118 and the dielectric 119 located in the z-axis direction of the first electrode 117.

At this time, the direction of the elastic force of the elastic member 121 is opposite to the z-axis. Accordingly, when the pressure applied to the core body 11 is removed, the elastic member 121 is restored by elastic force as shown in (a) of FIG. 13.

Figure 14 is a diagram showing a partial structure of the resonance circuit part of the stylus pen according to the fourth aspect, and Figure 15 is a graph showing the change in capacitance value of the stylus pen according to the fourth aspect.

As shown in (a) of FIG. 14, compared to the stylus pen of the first embodiment, the stylus pen of this embodiment includes dielectrics 119a and 119b having different dielectric constants. The dielectrics 119a and 119b may be located at different positions along the z-axis direction. The dielectric constant of the first dielectric 119a, which is closer to the first electrode 117, is greater than the dielectric constant of the second dielectric 119b.

As shown in (b) of FIG. 14, when the stylus pen 10 contacts the touch screen 20 with weak pen pressure (a (gf) or less in FIG. 15), the first electrode 117 is the first electrode 117. Since it moves within the length L1 of the dielectric 119a, the increase in capacitance due to the increase in pressure is relatively large.

As shown in (c) of FIG. 14, when the stylus pen 10 contacts the touch screen 20 with strong pen pressure (exceeding a (gf) in FIG. 15), the first electrode 117 Since it moves between the length L1 of the dielectric 119a and the total length L2 of the first and second dielectrics 119a and 119b, the increase in capacitance due to increase in pressure is relatively small.

That is, the difference between the capacitance of the stylus pen 10 that is not in contact with the touch screen 20 and the capacitance of the stylus pen 10 in contact with the touch screen 20 is large. Therefore, the touch screen 20 can determine whether or not the stylus pen 10 is in contact by recognizing a signal change due to a sudden change in capacitance of the stylus pen 10.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a partial structure of the resonance circuit portion of the stylus pen according to the fifth aspect, FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the structure of the dielectric of FIG. 16, and FIG. 18 is a change in capacitance value of the stylus pen according to the fifth aspect. This is a graph showing .

As shown in (a) of FIG. 16, compared to the stylus pen of the first embodiment, the distribution of the dielectric 119 of the stylus pen of this embodiment is different. The dielectric 119a may be positioned in different distributions along the z-axis direction. The distribution of the dielectric 119 in the region S1 adjacent to the first electrode 117 is high. For example, the thickness of the dielectric 119 in the region S1 is thicker than the thickness of the dielectric 119 in the region S2 spaced apart from the first electrode 117. In addition, the distribution of the dielectric 119 will be described with reference to FIG. 17.

Referring to (a) of FIG. 17, a plurality of dielectrics 1190 to 1195 are located on the second electrode 118, and the area of each dielectric 1190 to 1195 in the region S1 is the area S2. It is wider than the area of each dielectric (1190 to 1195) in .

Referring to (b) of FIG. 17, a plurality of dielectrics 119a to 119e are located on the second electrode 118, and the area of the dielectrics 119a and 119b adjacent to the region S1 is adjacent to the region S2. It is wider than the area of the dielectrics 119e and 119d.

In addition, the dielectric 119 may be positioned in various ways so that the distribution of the dielectric 119 in the region S1 adjacent to the first electrode 117 is greater than in other regions.

As shown in (b) of FIG. 16, when the stylus pen 10 contacts the touch screen 20 with low pen pressure (a (gf) or less in FIG. 18), the first electrode 117 has a large thickness. Since the dielectric 119 moves within the length L1 of the region, the increase in capacitance due to the increase in pressure is relatively large.

As shown in (c) of FIG. 16, when the stylus pen 10 contacts the touch screen 20 with strong pen pressure (exceeding a (gf) in FIG. 18), the first electrode 117 is formed of a dielectric ( 119), the increase in capacitance due to increase in pressure is relatively small.

That is, the difference between the capacitance of the stylus pen 10 that is not in contact with the touch screen 20 and the capacitance of the stylus pen 10 in contact with the touch screen 20 is large. Therefore, the touch screen 20 can determine whether or not the stylus pen 10 is in contact by recognizing a signal change due to a sudden change in capacitance of the stylus pen 10.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a partial structure of the resonance circuit portion of the stylus pen according to the sixth aspect, and FIG. 20 is a graph showing the change in capacitance value of the stylus pen according to the sixth aspect shown in FIG. 19.

As shown in (a) of FIG. 19, compared to the stylus pen of the first embodiment, the stylus pen of this embodiment further includes an additional capacitor portion 131. The additional capacitor unit 131 and the capacitor unit 13 formed by the first electrode 117a and the second electrode 118 are connected to each other in parallel.

The additional capacitor unit 131 is electrically connected to the first electrode 117b as the first electrode 117b moves in the z-axis direction. The additional capacitor unit 131 includes two electrodes 1310 and 1312 and a dielectric 1314 between the two electrodes 1310 and 1312. The additional capacitor unit 131 may be located on the PCB (130). For example, the additional capacitor unit 131 is located on the first side of the PCB (130). One of the two electrodes 1310 and 1312 is connected to the wiring 132 passing through the first and second sides of the PCB 130.

As shown in (a) of FIG. 19, when no pressure is applied to the core body 11, the additional capacitor portion 131 is not electrically connected to the first electrode 117b. At this time, the capacitance due to the first electrode 117a and the second electrode 118 is very small or non-existent (less than a(gf) in FIG. 20).

As shown in (b) of FIG. 19, when pressure is applied to the core body 11, the first electrodes 117a and 117b move in the x-axis direction. Then, the first electrode 117b is electrically connected to the additional capacitor unit 131, and the capacitance generated by the first electrode 117a and the second electrode 118 increases.

For example, the first electrode 117b is electrically connected to the additional capacitor unit 131, and when the first electrode 117a moves by a predetermined length L3, it overlaps the second electrode 118 in the z-axis direction. Let's begin. Then, the capacitance of the first electrode 117a and the second electrode 118 is formed according to Equation 1, and the total capacitance of the capacitor portion 13 is rapidly increased by the additional capacitor portion 131 connected in parallel ( a(gf) in Figure 20).

Thereafter, as the pressure applied to the core 11 increases, the overlapping area between the first electrode 117a and the second electrode 118 increases, and thus the capacitance also increases.

As described above, the stylus pen 10 according to the present embodiments shown in FIGS. 10 to 20 uses a simple structure to change the capacitance of the resonance circuit unit 12, so that the pen pressure of the stylus pen can be detected, It has the advantage of lowering the manufacturing cost of the stylus pen. Additionally, it has the advantage of being able to precisely measure pen pressure using a stylus pen.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing another embodiment of the resonance circuit unit 12 of the stylus pen shown in (a) and (b) of FIG. 1.

As shown in FIG. 21, the stylus pen 10 includes a core body 11 located within the housing 16, a ferrite core 115, a coil 116 wound on the ferrite core 115, and an inside of the housing 16. It includes a magnetic body 117 located at. Here, the housing 16 may also be referred to as a body portion.

The core body 11 is inserted into the through hole of the ferrite core 115. One end of the core body 11 functions as a pen tip of the stylus pen 10. The ferrite core 115 may move in the z-axis direction in conjunction with the z-axis pressure of the core body 11.

When the ferrite core 115 moves in the z-axis direction, the relative position between the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 changes, causing the magnetic flux density to change. The inductance of the inductor unit 14 changes due to changes in magnetic flux density. When the distance between the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 decreases, the inductance increases, and when the distance between the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 increases, the inductance decreases.

The permeability of the magnetic material 117 may be the same as or different from the permeability of the ferrite core 115. When the magnetic permeability of the magnetic material 117 is greater than the magnetic permeability of the ferrite core 115, compared to the case where the magnetic permeability of the magnetic material 117 is smaller than the magnetic permeability of the ferrite core 115, the magnetic material 117 is between the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117. The change in magnetic flux density due to change in relative position is also greater.

In this drawing, the ferrite core 115 is shown to have a cylindrical shape and the magnetic material 117 is shown to have a ring shape surrounding the ferrite core 115. However, the shapes of the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 are as follows. Not limited. For example, the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 may be formed in the form of a cylinder, a polygonal pillar, a pillar with at least a portion of the curved surface, a double-sided pillar, a truncated pyramid, a truncated cone, a toroid, etc. The magnetic material 117 may be attached to the housing 16 in the form of a sheet or may be applied in the form of powder.

As the pressure applied to one end of the core body 11 increases, the ferrite core 115 moves in the z-axis direction. As the ferrite core 115 moves in the z-axis direction, the distance between the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 increases. Then, the inductance value of the inductor unit 14 decreases.

Hereinafter, various modified examples of the stylus pen according to another embodiment of the present invention shown in FIG. 21 will be described in detail.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a partial structure of the resonance circuit portion of the stylus pen according to the first aspect, and FIG. 23 is a graph showing the change in inductance value of the stylus pen according to the first aspect.

In Figure 22, a cross section of the stylus pen 10 is shown along the xz plane.

As shown in (a) of FIG. 22, the core body 11 is combined with the ferrite core 115. As a result, the ferrite core 115 moves due to the pressure applied to the core body 11.

A first member 111 is disposed on the other side of the ferrite core 115, where the core body 11 is located on one side. When the ferrite core 115 moves in the z-axis direction, the first member 111 may also move in the z-axis direction. An elastic member 121 is disposed between the first member 111 and the support member 161 located inside the housing 16. The elastic member 121 is supported by the support member 161. A second member 120 is disposed at one end of the first member 111. The second member 120 may be fastened to the locking member 162 located on the inner surface of the housing 16. The locking member 162 prevents the core body 11 from being removed from the housing 16 by the elastic member 121 pressing the first member 111 in a direction opposite to the z-axis.

As shown in (b) of FIG. 22, as the core body 11 moves in the z-axis direction, the ferrite core 115 and the first member 111 may also move in the z-axis direction. The elastic member 121 may be compressed in the z-axis direction as the first member 111 moves in the z-axis direction. At this time, the direction of the elastic force of the elastic member 121 is opposite to the z-axis. Therefore, when the pressure applied to the core body 11 is removed, the elastic member 121 is restored by elastic force as shown in (a) of FIG. 22.

As the ferrite core 115 moves in the z-axis direction, the distance between the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 increases.

Then, as shown in FIG. 23, when the stylus pen 10 contacts the touch screen 20, the ferrite core 115 is separated from the magnetic material 117, so inductance is reduced. Additionally, as the pen pressure increases, the distance between the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 further increases, thereby further reducing the inductance.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the structure of the magnetic material of FIG. 22.

The distribution of the magnetic material 117 inside the housing 16 may be different. The magnetic material 117 may be positioned in different distributions along the z-axis direction. For example, the magnetic material 117 may have different thickness and/or area depending on the z-axis direction.

Referring to (a) of FIG. 24, the shapes of each magnetic material 1170 to 1175 on the inner surface of the housing 16 have different lengths in the x-axis direction along the z-axis direction. Accordingly, as the ferrite core 115 moves in the z-axis direction, the amount of change in magnetic flux density changes.

Referring to (b) of FIG. 24, the magnetic material 117 includes a plurality of magnetic materials 117a to 117e, and the area of the plurality of magnetic materials 117a to 117e gradually decreases along the z-axis direction.

In addition, the magnetic material 117 may be positioned in various ways so that the distribution of the magnetic material 117 is different depending on the z-axis direction.

For example, referring again to FIG. 22, when the stylus pen 10 contacts the touch screen 20 with light pen pressure, the ferrite core 115 moves within the area where the magnetic material 117 is located in a high distribution. , the inductance decreases significantly as pressure increases.

When the stylus pen 10 contacts the touch screen 20 with strong pen pressure, the ferrite core 115 moves within an area where the magnetic material 117 is located in a low distribution, so the decrease in inductance due to pressure increase is small.

That is, the difference between the inductance of the stylus pen 10 that is not in contact with the touch screen 20 and the inductance of the stylus pen 10 in contact with the touch screen 20 is large. Therefore, the touch screen 20 can determine whether or not the stylus pen 10 is in contact by recognizing a signal change caused by a sudden change in inductance of the stylus pen 10.

Figure 25 is a diagram showing a partial structure of the resonance circuit portion of the stylus pen according to the second aspect.

As shown in (a) of FIG. 25, compared to the stylus pen of the first embodiment shown in (a) of FIG. 25, the stylus pen of this embodiment has a magnetic body 117 on the inner side of the housing 16. It may protrude at a predetermined height.

As shown in (b) of FIG. 25, as the core body 11 moves in the z-axis direction, the ferrite core 115 and the first member 111 may also move in the z-axis direction. The elastic member 121 may be compressed in the z-axis direction as the first member 111 moves in the z-axis direction. At this time, the direction of the elastic force of the elastic member 121 is opposite to the z-axis. Therefore, when the pressure applied to the core body 11 is removed, the elastic member 121 is restored by elastic force as shown in (a) of FIG. 25.

As the ferrite core 115 moves in the z-axis direction, the distance between the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 increases. When the stylus pen 10 contacts the touch screen 20, the ferrite core 115 is separated from the magnetic material 117, so inductance is reduced. Additionally, as the pen pressure increases, the distance between the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 further increases, thereby further reducing the inductance.

Figure 26 is a diagram showing a partial structure of the resonance circuit part of the stylus pen according to the third aspect, and Figure 27 is a graph showing the change in inductance value of the stylus pen according to the third aspect.

As shown in (a) of FIG. 26, compared to the stylus pen of the first embodiment, the magnetic body 117 of the stylus pen of this embodiment is located close to the first member 111.

As shown in (b) of FIG. 26, as the core body 11 moves in the z-axis direction, the ferrite core 115 and the first member 111 may also move in the z-axis direction. The elastic member 121 may be compressed in the z-axis direction as the first member 111 moves in the z-axis direction. At this time, the direction of the elastic force of the elastic member 121 is opposite to the z-axis. Therefore, when the pressure applied to the core body 11 is removed, the elastic member 121 is restored by elastic force as shown in (a) of FIG. 26.

As the ferrite core 115 moves in the z-axis direction, the distance between the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 decreases.

When the stylus pen 10 touches the touch screen 20, the ferrite core 115 approaches the magnetic material 117, and thus the inductance increases, as shown in FIG. 27. Additionally, as the pen pressure increases, the distance between the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 further decreases, thereby further increasing the inductance.

Figure 28 is a diagram showing a partial structure of the resonance circuit portion of the stylus pen according to the fourth aspect.

As shown in (a) of FIG. 28, compared to the stylus pen of the third embodiment, the stylus pen of the present embodiment may have a magnetic body 117 protruding from the inner surface of the housing 16 at a predetermined height.

As shown in (b) of FIG. 28, as the core body 11 moves in the z-axis direction, the ferrite core 115 and the first member 111 may also move in the z-axis direction. The elastic member 121 may be compressed in the z-axis direction as the first member 111 moves in the z-axis direction. At this time, the direction of the elastic force of the elastic member 121 is opposite to the z-axis. Therefore, when the pressure applied to the core body 11 is removed, the elastic member 121 is restored by elastic force as shown in (a) of FIG. 28.

As the ferrite core 115 moves in the z-axis direction, the distance between the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 decreases. When the stylus pen 10 contacts the touch screen 20, the ferrite core 115 approaches the magnetic material 117, so inductance increases. Additionally, as the pen pressure increases, the distance between the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 further decreases, thereby further increasing the inductance.

As described above, the stylus pen 10 according to the present embodiments shown in FIGS. 21 to 28 uses a simple structure to change the inductance of the resonance circuit unit 12, so that the pen pressure of the stylus pen can be detected, It has the advantage of lowering the manufacturing cost of the stylus pen. Additionally, it has the advantage of being able to precisely measure pen pressure using a stylus pen.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing another embodiment of the resonance circuit portion 12 of the stylus pen shown in FIGS. 1 (a) and (b).

Referring to FIG. 29, the resonance circuit unit 12 of the stylus pen 10c may include a capacitor unit 13 and an inductor unit 14. The inductor unit 14 may include a ferrite core 115 and a coil 116 wound around the ferrite core 115. The inductor unit 14 may further include a magnetic material 117.

A through hole may be formed in the ferrite core 115 along the axial direction (not shown) (Z-axis direction in FIG. 29). This through hole is formed to allow the core 11 to be inserted through it, and the core 11 can be inserted into this through hole. Therefore, when the core body 11 needs to be replaced, only the core body 11 can be separated from the ferrite core 115 and replaced, which has the advantage of easy replacement.

One end of the core body 11 may function as a pen tip of the stylus pen 10c. One end of the core body 11 functioning as a pen tip may be exposed to the outside of the ferrite core 115 through an opening of a through hole formed on one surface of the ferrite core 115. When axial pressure is applied to one end that functions as a pen tip, the core body 11 can move along the through hole of the ferrite core 115, that is, in the Z-axis direction. In contrast, the position of the ferrite core 115 may be fixed inside the housing 15 of the stylus pen 10c. That is, the ferrite core 115 can be fixed to a specific position within the housing 15 regardless of the pen pressure applied to the core body 11. In this embodiment, the ferrite core 115 and coil 116 were fixed below the magnetic material 117, that is, closer to the pen tip portion of the core body 11, thereby improving performance and ensuring mass production. Here, the housing 15 may also be referred to as a body portion.

A magnetic material 117 may be coupled to the other end of the core body 11. The other end of the core body 11 may pass through the opening of the through hole formed on the other surface of the ferrite core 115 and contact the magnetic material 117. When the core body 11 moves in the Z-axis direction, the magnetic body 117 may move in the Z-axis direction along the movement of the core body 11.

A fixing member 119 may be located inside the housing 15. The fixing member 119 may be fixed inside the housing 15 to limit the amount of displacement of the core body 11 and the magnetic body 117. An elastic member 118 may be positioned between the fixing member 119 and the magnetic body 117. The elastic member 118 may be supported by the fixing member 119. When pressure in the Z-axis direction is applied to the core body 11 and the magnetic material 117 moves toward the fixing member 119, the elastic member 118 may be compressed in the Z-axis direction. If there is no pressure in the Z-axis direction applied to the core body 11, or if the pressure in the Z-axis direction applied to the core body 11 is smaller than the elastic force of the elastic member 118, the magnetic body 117 and the core body 11 ) may move to the initial position or maintain the initial position by the elastic force of the elastic member 118. The elastic member 118 may be formed of a material having elastic force, such as a spring or elastic rubber.

When the core body 11 moves in the Z-axis direction, the magnetic material 117 moves in the Z-axis direction in conjunction with this, and thus may be spaced apart from the ferrite core 115 in the Z-axis direction. Accordingly, the relative position between the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 may vary.

FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the stylus pen of FIG. 29 according to pen pressure.

Referring to (a) of FIG. 30, when the core 11 is not in contact with the touch screen 20 ('Hover' state), the core 11 and the magnetic body 117 can maintain their initial positions without moving. there is. Accordingly, the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 can contact each other or maintain a very close separation distance.

Referring to (b) of FIG. 30, when one end of the core body 11 contacts the touch screen 20 ('Contact' state), the core body 11 and The magnetic material 117 may move in the Z-axis direction. At this time, the ferrite core 115 maintains a fixed position within the housing 15 regardless of pen pressure, so the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 are spaced apart from each other, or the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 ) can be increased.

Referring to (c) of FIG. 30, when pen pressure gradually increases ('Pressure' state) after one end of the core body 11 contacts the touch screen 20, the core body 11 and the magnetic body 117 are The pendulum can move in the Z-axis direction depending on the pen pressure applied to (11). That is, the core body 11 and the magnetic body 117 can move further in the Z-axis direction as pen pressure increases. Accordingly, the separation distance between the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 may also increase as the pen pressure increases.

The magnetic material 117 may be made of a material with the same or different magnetic permeability as the ferrite core 115. As an example, the magnetic material 117 may be formed of ferrite having the same magnetic permeability as the ferrite core 115. This magnetic material 117 can affect the inductance of the coil 116, and the relative position change between the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 changes the amount of change in magnetic flux density, thereby changing the inductance of the resonance circuit unit 12. You can do it.

FIG. 31 is a diagram schematically showing an equivalent circuit of the resonance circuit portion of the stylus pen of FIG. 29.

Referring to FIGS. 29 and 31 together, when the magnetic material 117 moves according to pen pressure, the inductance L of the inductor unit 14 may vary according to pen pressure. This variable inductance (L) may gradually decrease as the separation distance between the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 increases. That is, as the pen pressure applied to the core body 11 increases and the separation distance between the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 increases, the inductance value of the resonance circuit unit 12 may gradually decrease.

When the inductance L of the inductor unit 14 changes, the resonance frequency of the resonance circuit unit 12 changes. Therefore, in this embodiment, when pen pressure is applied to the stylus pen 10c, the resonance frequency of the resonance circuit unit 12 may change due to a change in inductance. When the resonance frequency of the resonance circuit unit 12 changes, the phase of the electromagnetic signal output from the stylus pen 10c in response to the driving signal of the touch screen 20 changes. Then, the touch controller 262 can detect the pen pressure by calculating the amount of change in inductance of the resonance circuit unit 12 from the changed phase of the electromagnetic signal output from the stylus pen 10c.

FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating another embodiment of the resonance circuit unit 12 of the stylus pen shown in FIGS. 1 (a) and (b).

Referring to FIG. 32, the resonance circuit unit 12 of the stylus pen 10d may include a capacitor unit 13 and an inductor unit 14. The capacitor unit 13 may include one or more resonance capacitors (C) electrically connected to the coil 116 of the inductor unit 14. The capacitor unit 13 is selectively connected to the coil 116 and may further include an additional capacitor (CP) connected in parallel with the resonance capacitor (C) when connected to the coil 116.

In the ferrite core 115, a through hole is formed along the axis direction (Z-axis direction in FIG. 32) through which the core body 11 is inserted, and the core body 11 can be inserted into this through hole. The position of the ferrite core 115 may be fixed inside the housing 15 of the stylus pen 10d. In this embodiment, the ferrite core 115 and coil 116 were fixed below the switching member 120, that is, close to the pen tip portion of the core body 11, thereby improving performance and ensuring mass production.

One end of the core body 11 may function as a pen tip of the stylus pen 10d. One end of the core body 11 functioning as a pen tip may be exposed to the outside of the ferrite core 115 through an opening of a through hole formed on one surface of the ferrite core 115. When axial pressure is applied to one end of the core body 11, which functions as a pen tip, the core body 11 can move along the through hole of the ferrite core 115 (i.e., in the Z-axis direction).

The stylus pen 10d may further include a switching member 20 including a movable part 121 and a fixed part 122. The movable part 121 may be coupled to the other end of the core body 11. The other end of the core body 11 may pass through the opening of the through hole formed on the other surface of the ferrite core 115 and contact the movable part 121. When the core body 11 moves in the Z-axis direction, the movable part 121 may move in the Z-axis direction along the movement of the core body 11. The fixed part 122 is located between the ferrite core 115 and the movable part 121 and can maintain a fixed position. As an example, the fixed part 122 may be fixed to an end of the ferrite core 115 that faces the movable part 121. In the switching member 120 of this structure, the movable part 121 may contact the fixed part 122 or be spaced apart from the fixed part 122 according to the movement of the core body 11.

A fixing member 119 may be positioned between the capacitor portion 13 and the inductor portion 14 inside the housing 15 to limit the amount of displacement of the core body 11 and the movable portion 121. An elastic member 118 may be positioned between the fixing member 119 and the magnetic body 117. The elastic member 118 may be supported by the fixing member 119. When pressure in the Z-axis direction is applied to the core body 11 and the core body 11 and the movable part 121 move toward the fixed member 119, the elastic member 118 may be compressed in the Z-axis direction. If there is no pressure in the Z-axis direction applied to the core body 11, or if the pressure in the Z-axis direction applied to the core body 11 is smaller than the elastic force of the elastic member 118, the movable part 121 and the core body 11 ) may move to the initial position or maintain the initial position by the elastic force of the elastic member 118.

FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the stylus pen of FIG. 32 according to pen pressure.

Referring to (a) of FIG. 33, when the core body 11 is not in contact with the touch screen 20 ('Hover' state), there is no pressure applied to the core body 11 in the Z-axis direction. The core body 11 and the movable part 121 can maintain their initial positions without movement. Accordingly, the movable part 121 can remain in contact with the fixed part 122.

Referring to (b) of FIG. 33, when one end of the core body 11 contacts the touch screen 20 ('Contact' state), the core body 11 and The movable part 121 can move in the Z-axis direction. Accordingly, the movable part 121 may be spaced apart from the fixed part 122.

The movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 may each include a substrate and one or more conductive contacts 125 and 126 formed on the substrate. The movable part 121 may include one or more conductive contacts 125 electrically connected to the additional capacitor CP. The fixing part 122 may include one or more contacts 126 electrically connected to the coil 116. These contacts 125 and 126 may be formed to face each other on surfaces of the substrate of the movable portion 121 and the substrate of the fixed portion 122 . Accordingly, the contacts 125 and 126 are in contact with each other or spaced apart depending on the contact state of the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122, and operate to switch the electrical connection between the additional capacitor CP and the coil 116. You can.

FIG. 34 is a diagram schematically showing an equivalent circuit of the resonance circuit portion of the stylus pen of FIG. 32. 34 as an example, the contacts 125-1 and 125-2 of the movable part 121 are respectively connected to both ends of the additional capacitor CP, and the contacts 126-1 and 126 of the fixed part 122 -2) are connected to both ends of the coil 116, respectively. Accordingly, when the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 contact each other, the contact 125-1 of the movable part 121 and the contact 126-1 of the fixed part 122 contact each other. When the contact 125-2 of the movable part 121 and the contact 126-2 of the fixed part 122 contact each other, an additional capacitor CP will be connected in parallel to the coil 116 together with the resonance capacitor C. You can. On the other hand, the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 are spaced apart from each other, so that the contact 125-1 of the movable part 121, the contact 126-1 of the fixed part 122, and the contact of the movable part 121 ( When the electrical connection between 125-2) and the contact 126-2 of the fixing part 122 is released, the additional capacitor CP is electrically separated from the resonance capacitor C and the coil 116, thereby causing resonance. The capacitance of the circuit unit 12 may be reduced.

When the capacitance of the resonance circuit portion 12 changes, the resonance frequency of the resonance circuit portion 12 changes. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the stylus pen 10d contacts the touch screen 20, the additional capacitor CP is disconnected, so the resonance frequency of the resonance circuit unit 12 may change. When the resonance frequency of the resonance circuit unit 12 changes, the phase of the electromagnetic signal output from the stylus pen 10d in response to the driving signal of the touch screen 20 changes. Then, the touch controller 262 can detect whether or not the touch screen 20 is in contact by detecting a change in capacitance of the resonance circuit unit 12 from the changed phase of the electromagnetic signal output from the stylus pen 10d.

Figure 35 is a diagram showing another embodiment of the resonance circuit unit 12 of the stylus pen shown in Figures 1 (a) and (b).

Referring to FIG. 35, the resonance circuit unit 12 of the stylus pen 10e may include a capacitor unit 13 and an inductor unit 14. The inductor unit 14 includes a ferrite core 115 and a coil 116 wound around the ferrite core 115, and may further include a magnetic material 117. The capacitor unit 13 includes one or more resonance capacitors (C) and may further include an additional capacitor (CP).

In the ferrite core 115, a through hole is formed along the axial direction (Z-axis direction in Fig. 36) to allow the core body 11 to be inserted through it, and the core body 11 is inserted into this through hole. The position of the ferrite core 115 may be fixed inside the housing 15 of the stylus pen 10e. In this embodiment, mass production was secured by fixing the ferrite core 115 and coil 116 below the magnetic body 117 and the switching member 120, that is, closer to the pen tip portion of the core body 11.

One end of the core body 11 may function as a pen tip of the stylus pen 10e. One end of the core body 11 functioning as a pen tip may be exposed to the outside of the ferrite core 115 through an opening of a through hole formed on one surface of the ferrite core 115. When axial pressure is applied to one end that functions as a pen tip, the core body 11 can move along the through hole of the ferrite core 115 (i.e., in the Z-axis direction).

A magnetic material 117 may be coupled to the other end of the core body 11. When the core body 11 moves in the Z-axis direction, the magnetic body 117 may move in the Z-axis direction along the movement of the core body 11.

The stylus pen 10e may further include a switching member 20 including a movable part 121 and a fixed part 122. The movable part 121 is coupled to the other end of the core body 11 and may be located between the magnetic material 117 and the ferrite core 115. The other end of the core body 11 may contact the movable part 121 through an opening of a through hole formed on the other surface of the ferrite core 115. The movable part 121 together with the magnetic body 117 may be moved in the axial direction (Z-axis direction in FIG. 36) according to the movement of the core body 11. The fixed part 122 is located between the ferrite core 115 and the movable part 121 and can maintain a fixed position. As an example, the fixed part 122 may be coupled to an end of the ferrite core 115 that faces the movable part 121. In the switching member 120 of this structure, the movable part 121 may contact the fixed part 122 or be spaced apart from the fixed part 122 according to the movement of the core body 11.

A fixing member 119 may be positioned between the capacitor portion 13 and the inductor portion 14 inside the housing 15 to limit the amount of displacement of the core body 11 and the movable portion 121. An elastic member 118 may be positioned between the fixing member 119 and the magnetic body 117. The elastic member 118 applies an elastic force when there is no pressure in the Z-axis direction applied to the core body 11 or when the pressure in the Z-axis direction applied to the core body 11 is smaller than the elastic force of the elastic member 118. Through this, the function of restoring the core body 11, the magnetic body 117, and the movable part 121 to their initial positions can be performed.

FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the stylus pen of FIG. 35 according to pen pressure.

Referring to (a) of FIG. 36, when the core 11 is not in contact with the touch screen 20 ('Hover' state), there is no pressure applied to the core 11 in the Z-axis direction. The core body 11 can maintain its initial position without movement. Accordingly, the movable part 121 and the magnetic body 117 can also maintain their initial positions without movement. In the initial position, the movable part 121 is in contact with the fixed part 122, and the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 are spaced very close apart (in the Z-axis direction of the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122). (corresponding to the height) can be maintained.

Referring to (b) of FIG. 36, when one end of the core 11 contacts the touch screen 20 ('Contact' state), the core 11 is moved by the pressure applied to the core 11 upon contact. It can move in the Z-axis direction. Accordingly, the movable part 121 is spaced apart from the fixed part 122, and the distance between the magnetic material 117 and the ferrite core 115 can also be increased by the moving distance of the core body 11.

Referring to (c) of FIG. 36, when the pen pressure gradually increases after one end of the core body 11 contacts the touch screen 20 ('Pressure' state), the core body 11 moves in the Z-axis direction according to the pen pressure. You can move further. Accordingly, the movable part 121 and the magnetic body 117 also move additionally in the Z-axis direction by the additional movement distance of the core body 11, and the separation distance between the magnetic body 117 and the ferrite core 115 can also be further increased. there is.

The movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 may each include a substrate and one or more contacts 125 and 126 formed on the substrate. The movable part 121 may include one or more contacts 125 that are electrically connected to the additional capacitor CP. The fixing part 122 may include one or more contacts 126 electrically connected to the coil 116. These contacts 125 and 126 may be formed to face each other on surfaces of the substrate of the movable portion 121 and the substrate of the fixed portion 122 . Accordingly, the contacts 125 and 126 are in contact with each other or spaced apart depending on the contact state of the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122, and operate to switch the electrical connection between the additional capacitor CP and the coil 116. You can.

FIG. 37 is a diagram schematically showing an equivalent circuit of the resonance circuit portion of the stylus pen of FIG. 35. In addition, FIG. 38 is a graph showing, for example, the LC value change according to pen pressure of the stylus pen of FIG. 35, and FIG. 39 is a graph showing the frequency response characteristics of the stylus pen of FIG. 35 as an example.

37 as an example, the contacts 125-1 and 125-2 of the movable part 121 are respectively connected to both ends of the additional capacitor CP, and the contacts 126-1 and 126 of the fixed part 122 -2) are connected to both ends of the coil 116, respectively. Accordingly, when the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 contact each other, the contact 125-1 and the contact 126-1 contact each other, and the contacts 125-2 and 126-2 contact each other. In contact with each other, an additional capacitor CP may be connected in parallel to the coil 116 together with the resonant capacitor C. On the other hand, the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 are spaced apart from each other, so that the contacts 125-1 and 126-1, and the contacts 125-2 and 126-2 are electrically connected. When released, the additional capacitor CP is separated from the resonant capacitor C and the coil 116, which may reduce the capacitance of the resonant circuit 12.

Additionally, a change in the distance between the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 may change the inductance of the resonance circuit unit 12. Accordingly, the resonance circuit unit 12 may include an inductor unit 14 whose inductance value varies depending on pen pressure, as shown in FIG. 37 . The inductance value of the inductor unit 14 may gradually decrease as the separation distance between the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 increases.

Accordingly, the LC value of the resonance circuit unit 12 may gradually decrease as the pen pressure applied to the core body 11 increases. Figure 38 shows the change in LC value according to the change in pen pressure as an example, and the Th section is the section in which the core body 11 of the stylus pen 10e is not in contact with the touch screen 20 ('Hover' in Figure 36 state), and the point Tc represents immediately after the core body 11 of the stylus pen 10e contacts the touch screen 20 ('Contact' state in Figure 36), and the Tp section represents the state applied to the stylus pen 10e. This indicates a section in which pen pressure gradually increases (the 'Pressure' state in Figure 36).

Referring to FIG. 38, the LC value of the resonance circuit unit 12 maintains a constant value until (Th) before the core 11 of the stylus pen 10e contacts the touch screen 20, and then the core 11 changes. Immediately after contacting the touch screen 20 and the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 are separated (Tc), it decreases rapidly. In addition, in the section Tp in which pen pressure is applied to the stylus pen 10e after the stylus pen 10e contacts the touch screen 20, the LC value of the resonance circuit unit 12 may further decrease depending on the pen pressure. You can. That is, in this section Tp, as the pen pressure applied to the stylus pen 10e increases, the LC value of the resonance circuit unit 12 may gradually decrease. Referring to FIG. 38, the LC value of the resonance circuit unit 12 appears as 'Hover' state > 'Contact' state > 'Pressure' state. In addition, immediately after the core body 11 contacts the touch screen 20, the amount of change in the LC value appears larger than when the pen pressure gradually increases.

If the inductance and capacitance of the resonance circuit unit 12 are changed, the resonance frequency and Q value of the resonance circuit unit 12 may also be changed. The resonance frequency of the resonance circuit unit 12 increases as the inductance of the resonance circuit unit 12 decreases, and the Q value may decrease as the inductance decreases. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 39, the frequency characteristics of the resonance signal Vpen output from the resonance circuit unit 12 according to this embodiment have resonance as the moving distance of the core body 11 increases, that is, as the pen pressure increases. The frequency may increase ('Hover' state < 'Contact' state < 'Press' state), and the Q value may decrease ('Hover' state > 'Contact' state > 'Press' state).

When the resonance frequency of the resonance circuit unit 12 changes, the phase of the electromagnetic signal output from the stylus pen 10e in response to the driving signal of the touch screen 20 changes. Then, the touch controller 262 calculates the LC value change of the resonance circuit unit 12 from the changed phase of the electromagnetic signal output from the stylus pen 10e, and based on this, the contact of the stylus pen 10e with respect to the touch screen 20 and pen pressure can be detected.

As described above, the stylus pens 10c, 10d, and 10e according to the embodiments shown in FIGS. 29 to 39 use a simple structure to change at least one or both of the inductance and capacitance of the resonance circuit unit 12. Therefore, there is an advantage of lowering the manufacturing cost of a stylus pen capable of detecting pen pressure. Additionally, it has the advantage of being able to precisely measure pen pressure using a stylus pen.

Meanwhile, in the manufacturing process of the stylus pen according to the above-described embodiments, a soldering process may additionally occur in the process of configuring a circuit that detects touch and pen pressure. However, as soldering operations increase, the manufacturing process becomes more complex, which may increase manufacturing costs, and the possibility of contact failure due to poor soldering also increases. Therefore, in the process of implementing the pen pressure detection function of the stylus pen, it is necessary to minimize soldering connections.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the stylus pen 10 for reducing the complexity of the assembly process by minimizing soldering connections will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 45. FIGS. 40 to 45 show examples modified from the stylus pen 10e according to the third embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. 40 to 45, the same reference numerals are used for the same components as those of the stylus pen 10e according to the third embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted.

Figure 40 schematically shows a stylus pen 10f according to the fourth embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 40, in the stylus pen 10f according to the fourth embodiment, one end of the core 11 functions as a pen nib, and a magnetic body 117 may be located at the other end of the core 11. . When the core body 11 moves in the Z-axis direction by pen pressure, the magnetic body 117 may move in the Z-axis direction along the movement of the core body 11.

The stylus pen 10f may further include a switching member 120 including a movable part 121 and a fixed part 122.

The movable part 121 may be positioned to contact the magnetic material 117 or may be structurally coupled to the magnetic material 117. The movable part 121 may be located between the elastic member 118 and the magnetic body 117. The movable part 121 may be installed to be movable in the Z-axis direction inside the housing 15. When the core body 11 and the magnetic body 117 move toward the elastic member 118 due to pen pressure, the movable portion 121 also moves toward the elastic member 118 to press the elastic member 118. If there is no pressure in the Z-axis direction applied to the core body 11, or if the pressure in the Z-axis direction applied to the core body 11 is smaller than the elastic force of the elastic member 118, the movable portion 121 is an elastic member ( Due to the elastic force of 118), it can be moved to the initial position together with the magnetic body 117 and the core body 11, or can maintain the initial position.

The fixing part 122 may be installed to maintain a fixed position (eg, a position between the ferrite core 115 and the movable part 121) inside the housing 15. The fixing part 122 may include a through hole formed in the Z-axis direction at the center of the fixing part 122. A magnetic material 117 is inserted into the through hole of the fixing part 122, and the magnetic material 117 can move in the Z-axis direction along the through hole.

In the switching member 120 of this structure, the movable part 121 may contact the fixed part 122 or be spaced apart from the fixed part 122 according to the movement of the core body 11. If there is no pressure in the Z-axis direction applied to the core body 11, the movable part 121 may be positioned at an initial position in contact with the fixed part 122. On the other hand, when the core body 11 moves toward the elastic member 118 due to pressure applied in the Z-axis direction, the movable part 121 may be spaced apart from the fixed part 122.

The stylus pen 10f has a plurality of conductive contacts (CP11 to CP18) for electrical connection between the capacitor part 13 (resonant capacitor C and additional capacitor Cp) and the inductor part 14 (coil 116). ) and a plurality of conductive wires (W11 to W16).

The contacts CP11 and CP12 are located in the capacitor unit 13 and may be electrically connected to both ends of the additional capacitor Cp, respectively.

The contacts CP13 and CP14 may be located on the fixing member 119 or the capacitor unit 13. The contacts CP13 and CP14 may each be electrically connected to both ends of at least one resonance capacitor C. The contacts CP13 and CP14 may also be electrically connected to both ends of the coil 116, respectively.

Contacts CP15 and CP16 may be located on the movable portion 121 of the switching member 120. The contacts CP15 and CP16 may be electrically connected to the contacts CP13 and CP14 through wires W13 and W14, respectively. Accordingly, the contacts CP15 and CP16 may be electrically connected to both ends of the coil 16, respectively.

The contacts CP17 and CP18 may be located on the fixing portion 122 of the switching member 120. The contacts CP17 and CP18 may be electrically connected to the contacts CP11 and CP12 through wires W11 and W12, respectively. Accordingly, the contacts CP17 and CP18 may be electrically connected to both ends of the additional capacitor Cp, respectively.

The contacts CP11 to CP18 may be implemented in various forms capable of electrical connection, such as a conductive pad, a conductive tab, or a conductive bar (eg, a metal bar).

When the movable part 121 of the switching member 120 contacts the fixed part 122, the contacts CP15 and CP16 located on the movable part 121 and the contacts CP17 and CP18 located on the fixed part 122. can be electrically connected to each other. For example, when the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 contact each other, the contact CP15 may be electrically connected to the contact CP17, and the contact CP16 may be electrically connected to the contact CP18. The contacts CP15 and CP16 and the contacts CP17 and CP18 may also be electrically disconnected from each other when the movable portion 121 of the switching member 120 is spaced apart from the fixed portion 122.

When the movable part 121 of the switching member 120 contacts the fixed part 122, the contacts CP15 and CP16 located on the movable part 121 and the contacts CP17 and CP18 located on the fixed part 122. To electrically connect, additional conductive bars (not shown), contact holes (not shown), via holes (not shown), etc. may be used.

Due to the above-described structure, the stylus pen 10f has an additional capacitor Cp that switches the electrical connection between the coils 116 depending on whether there is contact between the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 of the switching member 120. It can be.

Referring to (a) of FIG. 40, when the core 11 is not in contact with the touch screen 20 ('Hover' state), there is no pressure applied to the core 11 in the Z-axis direction, so the core 11 is not in contact with the touch screen 20. (11) can maintain its initial position without moving. Accordingly, the movable part 121 and the magnetic material 117 can also maintain their initial positions without movement, and the ferrite core 115 and the magnetic material 117 can be in contact with each other or maintain a very close separation distance. In the initial position, the movable part 121 may remain in contact with the fixed part 122. Therefore, the contacts CP15 and CP16 of the movable part 121 remain electrically connected to the contacts CP17 and CP18 of the fixed part 122, so that both ends of the additional capacitor Cp are connected to the coil 116. It can be electrically connected to both ends of .

Referring to (b) of FIG. 40, when pen pressure is applied to the stylus pen 10f ('Pressure' state) while one end of the core body 11 is in contact with the touch screen 20, the core body 11 is It can move in the Z-axis direction depending on the pen pressure. Accordingly, the movable part 121 and the magnetic body 117 may also move in the Z-axis direction by the same distance as the core body 11, and the separation distance between the magnetic body 117 and the ferrite core 115 may also increase.

When the movable part 121 moves toward the elastic member 118 by pressure of the pen, the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 are spaced apart from each other, and the contacts (CP15, CP16) of the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 The electrical connection between the contacts CP17 and CP18 may be released. Accordingly, the electrical connection between the additional capacitor Cp and the coil 116 may also be disconnected.

In the stylus pen 10f of Figure 40, both ends of each wire (W11, W12, W13, W14) are connected to the corresponding contacts (CP11, CP12, CP13, CP14, CP15, CP16, CP17, and CP18) by soldering. can be combined Additionally, both ends of the coil 116 may be joined to the corresponding contacts CP13 and CP14 by soldering. Therefore, in the stylus pen 10f, eight contacts (CP11) are used for electrical connection between the capacitor part 13 (resonant capacitor C and additional capacitor Cp) and the inductor part 14 (coil 116). , CP12, CP13, CP14, CP15, CP16, CP17, CP18) soldering work may be required.

Figure 41 schematically shows a stylus pen 10g according to the fifth embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 41, the stylus pen 10g according to the fifth embodiment is electrically connected to the capacitor unit 13 (resonant capacitor C and additional capacitor Cp) and the inductor unit 14 (coil 116). For proper connection, it may include a plurality of conductive contacts (CP11, C14, CP15, and CP17) and a plurality of conductive wires (W11, W13). The stylus pen 10g may have some contacts and wires omitted from the stylus pen 10f according to the fourth embodiment described above.

The contact CP11 is located in the capacitor unit 13 and may be electrically connected to one end of the additional capacitor Cp. The other end of the additional capacitor (Cp) may remain electrically connected to the resonance capacitor (C) regardless of the movement of the core body (11). Therefore, in the stylus pen 10g, compared to the stylus pen 10g in FIG. 40, some contacts (CP12, CP16 in FIG. 40) for switching the electrical connection between the other end of the additional capacitor Cp and the coil 116 , CP18) and wires (W12, W14 in FIG. 40) may be omitted.

The contacts CP13 and CP14 may be located on the fixing member 119 or the capacitor unit 13. The contacts CP13 and CP14 may each be electrically connected to both ends of at least one resonance capacitor C. The contacts CP13 and CP14 may also be electrically connected to both ends of the coil 116, respectively. The contact CP14 may also be electrically connected to the other end of the additional capacitor Cp.

The contact CP15 is located in the movable portion 121 of the switching member 120 and may be electrically connected to the contact CP13 through a wire W13. Accordingly, the contact CP15 may be electrically connected to one end of the coil 16.

The contact CP17 is located in the fixing part 122 of the switching member 120 and may be electrically connected to the contact CP11 through a wire W11. Accordingly, the contact CP17 may be electrically connected to one end of the additional capacitor Cp.

The contacts CP11, CP13, CP14, CP15, and CP17 may be implemented in various forms capable of electrical connection, such as conductive pads, conductive tabs, and conductive bars (eg, metal bars).

When the movable part 121 of the switching member 120 contacts the fixed part 122, the contact CP15 located on the movable part 121 may be electrically connected to the contact CP17 located on the fixed part 122. . The contacts CP15 and CP17 may also be electrically disconnected from each other when the movable part 121 of the switching member 120 is spaced apart from the fixed part 122.

Due to the above-described structure, the stylus pen 10g is positioned between one end of the additional capacitor Cp and one end of the coil 116 depending on whether there is contact between the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 of the switching member 120. The electrical connection of can be switched.

Referring to (a) of FIG. 41, when the core body 11 is not in contact with the touch screen 20 ('Hover' state), the movable part 121 can remain in contact with the fixed part 122. there is. Therefore, the contact CP15 of the movable part 121 and the contact CP17 of the fixed part 12 remain electrically connected, so that both ends of the additional capacitor Cp are electrically connected to both ends of the coil 116. can be connected

Referring to (b) of FIG. 41, when pen pressure is applied to the stylus pen 10g ('Pressure' state) while one end of the core 11 is in contact with the touch screen 20, the core 11 is It can move in the Z-axis direction depending on the pen pressure. Accordingly, the movable part 121 and the magnetic body 117 can also move in the Z-axis direction by the distance the core body 11 moves. When the movable part 121 moves toward the elastic member 118 by pressure of the pen, the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 are spaced apart from each other, and the contact (CP15) of the movable part 121 and the contact (CP15) of the fixed part 122 ( The electrical connection between CP17) may be disconnected. Accordingly, one end of the additional capacitor Cp can be separated from the coil 116.

In the stylus pen 10g of FIG. 41, both ends of each wire W11 and W13 may be joined to the corresponding contacts CP11, CP13, CP15, and CP17 by soldering. Additionally, both ends of the coil 116 may be joined to the corresponding contacts CP13 and CP14 by soldering. Therefore, in the stylus pen 10g, for electrical connection between the capacitor portion 13 (resonant capacitor C and additional capacitor Cp) and the inductor portion 14 (coil 116), five contacts Soldering work may be required on (CP11, CP13, CP14, CP15, CP17).

Figure 42 schematically shows a stylus pen 10h according to the sixth embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 42, the stylus pen 10h according to the sixth embodiment is electrically connected to the capacitor unit 13 (resonant capacitor C and additional capacitor Cp) and the inductor unit 14 (coil 116). For proper connection, it may include a plurality of contacts (CP11, CP13, CP14, CP16), wires (W21), and contact structures (CP20). Compared to the stylus pen 10f according to the fourth embodiment described above, the stylus pen 10h may have some contacts and wires omitted or replaced with the contact structure CP20 or wire W21.

The contact CP11 is located in the capacitor unit 13 and may be electrically connected to one end of the additional capacitor Cp. The other end of the additional capacitor (Cp) may remain electrically connected to the resonance capacitor (C) regardless of the movement of the core body (11).

The contacts CP13 and CP14 may be located on the fixing member 119 or the capacitor unit 13. The contacts CP13 and CP14 may each be electrically connected to both ends of at least one resonance capacitor C. The contacts CP13 and CP14 may also be electrically connected to both ends of the coil 116, respectively. The contact CP14 may also be electrically connected to the other end of the additional capacitor Cp.

The contact CP16 is located in the movable part 121 of the switching member 120 and may be electrically connected to the contact CP11 through a wire W21. Accordingly, the contact (CP16) may be electrically connected to one end of the additional capacitor (Cp).

The contacts CP11, CP13, CP14, and CP16 may be implemented in various forms capable of electrical connection, such as conductive pads, conductive tabs, and conductive bars (eg, metal bars).

The contact structure CP20 may perform a function of switching the electrical connection between one end of the additional capacitor Cp and one end of the coil 116. The contact structure CP20 may include a connection portion 130 that electrically connects the two conductive contacts CP21 and CP22.

One end of the contact CP21 is located on the fixed part 122 of the switching member 120, and the other end extends in the Z-axis direction and may be coupled to penetrate a through hole formed in the movable part 121. The other end of the contact CP21 may be further extended in the Z-axis direction and electrically coupled to the contact CP13. Accordingly, the contact CP21 may be electrically connected to one end of the coil 116 through the contact CP13. The contact CP21 may be electrically connected to the contact CP13 through a bonding method such as soldering, or may be electrically connected to the contact CP13 through a contact method. The contact CP21 is coupled through a through hole in the Z-axis direction formed in the movable part 121, and can maintain a fixed position even if the movable part 121 moves in the Z-axis direction. The contact CP21 can continuously maintain a state of being electrically connected to one end of the coil 116 even if the movable part 121 moves in the Z-axis direction.

One end of the contact CP22 is located in the fixing part 122 of the switching member 120, and the other end may extend in the Z-axis direction. Contact CP22 can optionally be electrically connected to contact CP16. The contact CP22 may be electrically connected to the contact CP16 when the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 come into contact. The electrical connection between the contact CP22 and the contact CP16 may be interrupted when the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 are separated. Accordingly, the contact CP22 may be selectively electrically connected to one end of the additional capacitor Cp according to the movement of the movable part 121.

The connection part 130 is located in the fixing part 122 of the switching part 120 and can electrically connect the contact CP21 and the contact CP22.

Due to the above-described structure, the stylus pen 10h is positioned between one end of the additional capacitor Cp and one end of the coil 116 depending on whether there is contact between the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 of the switching member 120. The electrical connection of can be switched.

Referring to (a) of FIG. 42, when the core body 11 is not in contact with the touch screen 20 ('Hover' state), the movable part 121 can remain in contact with the fixed part 122. there is. Therefore, the electrical connection between the contact CP16 of the movable part 121 and the contact structure of the fixed part 122 is maintained, so that both ends of the additional capacitor Cp can be electrically connected to both ends of the coil 116. there is.

Referring to (b) of FIG. 42, when pen pressure is applied to the stylus pen 10h ('Pressure' state) while one end of the core 11 is in contact with the touch screen 20, the core 11 is It can move in the Z-axis direction depending on the pen pressure. Accordingly, the movable part 121 and the magnetic body 117 can also move in the Z-axis direction by the moving distance of the core body 11. When the movable part 121 moves toward the elastic member 118 due to pen pressure, the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 are spaced apart from each other, and the contact structure of the contact CP16 of the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 The electrical connection between (CP22) can be disconnected. Accordingly, one end of the additional capacitor Cp can be separated from the coil 116.

In the stylus pen 10h of FIG. 42, both ends of the wire W21 may be joined to the corresponding contacts CP11 and CP16 by soldering. Additionally, both ends of the coil 116 may be joined to the corresponding contacts CP13 and CP14 by soldering. Additionally, one end of the contact CP21 may be additionally bonded to the contact CP13 by soldering. Therefore, in the stylus pen 10h, for electrical connection between the capacitor portion 13 (resonant capacitor C and additional capacitor Cp) and the inductor portion 14 (coil 116), four contacts are used. Soldering work may be required on (CP11, CP13, CP14, CP16).

Figure 43 schematically shows a stylus pen 10i according to the seventh embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 43, the stylus pen 10i according to the seventh embodiment is electrically connected to the capacitor unit 13 (resonant capacitor C and additional capacitor Cp) and the inductor unit 14 (coil 116). For proper connection, it may include a plurality of contacts (CP13, CP14, CP16, CP31), a conductive elastic member 140, and a contact structure (CP20). Compared to the stylus pen 10h according to the sixth embodiment described above, the stylus pen 10i may have a wire omitted and a conductive elastic member 140 added.

The contact CP31 is located in the capacitor unit 13 or the fixing member 119 and may be electrically connected to one end of the additional capacitor Cp. The other end of the additional capacitor (Cp) may remain electrically connected to the resonance capacitor (C) regardless of the movement of the core body (11).

The contacts CP13 and CP14 may be located on the fixing member 119 or the capacitor unit 13. The contacts CP13 and CP14 may each be electrically connected to both ends of at least one resonance capacitor C. The contacts CP13 and CP14 may also be electrically connected to both ends of the coil 116, respectively. The contact CP14 may also be electrically connected to the other end of the additional capacitor Cp.

The contact CP16 is located in the movable portion 121 of the switching member 120 and may be electrically connected to the contact CP31 through a conductive elastic member, that is, a conductive spring 140. Accordingly, the contact (CP16) can be electrically connected to one end of the additional capacitor (Cp) without soldering. The conductive spring 140 may maintain both ends electrically connected to the contacts CP31 and CP16 regardless of the movement of the movable part 122.

The contacts CP13, CP14, CP16, and CP31 may be implemented in various forms capable of electrical connection, such as conductive pads, conductive tabs, and conductive bars (eg, metal bars).

The contact structure CP20 may perform a function of switching the electrical connection between one end of the additional capacitor Cp and one end of the coil 116. The contact structure CP20 may include a connection portion 130 that electrically connects the two conductive contacts CP21 and CP22.

One end of the contact CP21 is located on the fixed part 122 of the switching member 120, and the other end extends in the Z-axis direction and may be coupled to penetrate a through hole formed in the movable part 121. The other end of the contact CP21 may be further extended in the Z-axis direction and electrically coupled to the contact CP13. Accordingly, the contact CP21 may be electrically connected to one end of the coil 116 through the contact CP13. The contact CP21 may be electrically connected to the contact CP13 through a bonding method such as soldering, or may be electrically connected to the contact CP13 through a contact method. The contact CP21 is coupled through a through hole in the Z-axis direction formed in the movable part 121, and can maintain a fixed position even if the movable part 121 moves in the Z-axis direction. The contact CP21 can continuously maintain a state of being electrically connected to one end of the coil 116 even if the movable part 121 moves in the Z-axis direction.

One end of the contact CP22 is located in the fixing part 122 of the switching member 120, and the other end may extend in the Z-axis direction. Contact CP22 can optionally be electrically connected to contact CP16. The contact CP22 may be electrically connected to the contact CP16 when the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 come into contact. The electrical connection between the contact CP22 and the contact CP16 may be interrupted when the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 are separated. Accordingly, the contact CP22 may be selectively electrically connected to one end of the additional capacitor Cp according to the movement of the movable part 121.

The connection part 130 is located on the fixing part 122 of the switching part 120, and is electrically connected to a contact (CP21) electrically connected to one end of the coil 116 and optionally to one end of an additional capacitor (Cp). The contact (CP22) can be electrically connected.

Due to the above-described structure, the stylus pen 10i is positioned between one end of the additional capacitor Cp and one end of the coil 116 depending on whether there is contact between the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 of the switching member 120. The electrical connection of can be switched.

Referring to (a) of FIG. 43, when the core body 11 is not in contact with the touch screen 20 ('Hover' state), the movable part 121 can remain in contact with the fixed part 122. there is. Therefore, the contact CP16 of the movable part 121 and the contact structure 20 of the fixed part 122 are maintained electrically connected, so that both ends of the additional capacitor Cp are electrically connected to both ends of the coil 116. It can be connected to .

Referring to (b) of FIG. 43, when pen pressure is applied to the stylus pen 10i ('Pressure' state) while one end of the core 11 is in contact with the touch screen 20, the core 11 is It can move in the Z-axis direction depending on the pen pressure. Accordingly, the movable part 121 and the magnetic body 117 can also move in the Z-axis direction by the distance the core body 11 moves. When the movable part 121 moves toward the elastic member 118 due to pen pressure, the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 are spaced apart from each other, and the contact structure of the contact CP16 of the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 The electrical connection between (CP20) can be disconnected. Accordingly, one end of the additional capacitor Cp can be separated from the coil 116.

In the stylus pen 10i of FIG. 43, the conductive spring 140 may not require separate soldering work. Both ends of the coil 116 may be joined to the corresponding contacts CP13 and CP14 by soldering. Additionally, one end of the contact CP21 may be additionally bonded to the contact CP13 by soldering. Therefore, in the stylus pen 10i, for electrical connection between the capacitor portion 13 (resonant capacitor C and additional capacitor Cp) and the inductor portion 14 (coil 116), two contacts are used. Soldering work may be required at (CP13, CP14).

Figure 44 schematically shows a stylus pen 10j according to the eighth embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 44, the stylus pen 10j according to the eighth embodiment is electrically connected to the capacitor unit 13 (resonant capacitor C and additional capacitor Cp) and the inductor unit 14 (coil 116). Multiple contacts (CP13, CP14, CP31, CP41, CP42, CP43) can be included for direct connection.

The contact CP31 is located in the capacitor unit 13 or the fixing member 119 and may be electrically connected to one end of the additional capacitor Cp. The other end of the additional capacitor (Cp) may remain electrically connected to the resonance capacitor (C) regardless of the movement of the core body (11).

The contacts CP13 and CP14 may be located on the fixing member 119 or the capacitor unit 13. The contacts CP13 and CP14 may each be electrically connected to both ends of at least one resonance capacitor C. The contacts CP13 and CP14 may also be electrically connected to both ends of the coil 116, respectively. The contact CP14 may also be electrically connected to the other end of the additional capacitor Cp.

The contacts CP41, CP42, and CP43 may perform the function of switching the electrical connection between one end of the additional capacitor Cp and one end of the coil 116.

One end of the contact CP41 is located on the fixed part 122 of the switching member 120, and the other end extends in the Z-axis direction and may be coupled to penetrate the through hole formed in the movable part 121. The other end of the contact CP41 may be further extended in the Z-axis direction and electrically coupled to the contact CP13. Accordingly, the contact CP41 may be electrically connected to one end of the coil 116 through the contact CP13. The contact CP41 may be electrically connected to the contact CP13 through a bonding method such as soldering, or may be electrically connected to the contact CP41 through a contact method. The contact CP41 is coupled through a through hole in the Z-axis direction formed in the movable part 121, and can maintain a fixed position even if the movable part 121 moves in the Z-axis direction. Accordingly, the contact CP41 can continuously maintain a state of being electrically connected to one end of the coil 116 even if the movable part 121 moves in the Z-axis direction.

One end of the contact CP42 is located on the fixed part 122 of the switching member 120, and the other end extends in the Z-axis direction and may be coupled to penetrate the through hole formed in the movable part 121. The other end of the contact CP42 may be further extended in the Z-axis direction and electrically coupled to the contact CP31. Accordingly, the contact CP42 may be electrically connected to one end of the additional capacitor Cp through the contact CP31. The contact CP42 may be electrically connected to the contact CP31 through a bonding method such as soldering, or may be electrically connected to the contact CP31 through a contact method. The contact CP42 is coupled through a through hole in the Z-axis direction formed in the movable part 121, and can maintain a fixed position even if the movable part 121 moves in the Z-axis direction. Accordingly, the contact CP42 can remain electrically connected to one end of the additional capacitor Cp even if the movable part 121 moves in the Z-axis direction.

The contact CP43 may be located on a side of the movable part 121 that faces the magnetic material 117. The contact CP43 may be selectively electrically connected to the contact CP41 and the contact CP42 depending on the position of the movable part 121. At the initial position of the movable part 121, that is, in a state where the movable part 121 is in contact with the fixed part 122, both ends of the contact CP43 remain electrically connected to the contacts CP41 and C42, respectively. You can. When the movable part 121 moves toward the elastic member 118 from the initial position, that is, when the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 are spaced apart from each other, both ends of the contact CP43 are connected to the contacts C41 and CP42. Electrical connections may be disconnected.

Due to the above-described structure, the stylus pen 10j is positioned between one end of the additional capacitor Cp and one end of the coil 116 depending on whether there is contact between the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 of the switching member 120. The electrical connection of can be switched.

Referring to (a) of FIG. 44, when the core body 11 is not in contact with the touch screen 20 ('Hover' state), the movable part 121 maintains contact with the fixed part 122. . Accordingly, both ends of the contact CP43 remain electrically connected to the contacts CP41 and C42, respectively, so that both ends of the additional capacitor Cp can be electrically connected to the coil 116.

Referring to (b) of FIG. 44, when pen pressure is applied to the stylus pen 10j ('Pressure' state) while one end of the core 11 is in contact with the touch screen 20, the core 11 is It can move in the Z-axis direction depending on the pen pressure. Accordingly, the movable part 121 and the magnetic body 117 can also move in the Z-axis direction by the distance the core body 11 moves. When the movable part 121 moves toward the elastic member 118 by pressure of the pen, the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 are spaced apart from each other, and the contacts CP43 of the movable part 121 and the contacts of the fixed part 122 The electrical connection between (C41, PC42) may be released. Accordingly, one end of the additional capacitor Cp can be separated from the coil 116.

In the stylus pen 10j of Figure 44, the electrical connection between the contacts CP41, CP42, and CP43 may not require soldering. Both ends of the coil 116 may be joined to the corresponding contacts CP13 and CP14 by soldering. Therefore, in the stylus pen 10j, for electrical connection between the capacitor portion 13 (resonant capacitor C and additional capacitor Cp) and the inductor portion 14 (coil 116), two contacts are used. Soldering work may be required at (CP13, CP14). If necessary, additional soldering work may be required to bond the contacts CP41 and CP42 to the contacts CP13 and CP14, respectively.

Figure 45 schematically shows a stylus pen 10k according to the ninth embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 45, the stylus pen 10k according to the ninth embodiment is electrically connected to the capacitor unit 13 (resonant capacitor C and additional capacitor Cp) and the inductor unit 14 (coil 116). For proper connection, it may include a plurality of contacts (CP11, CP13, CP14, CP15, CP16), wires (W21), and contact structures (CP50). Compared to the stylus pen 10f according to the fourth embodiment described above, the stylus pen 10k may have some contacts and wires omitted or replaced with a contact structure CP50 or wire W21.

The contact CP11 is located in the capacitor unit 13 and may be electrically connected to one end of the additional capacitor Cp. The other end of the additional capacitor (Cp) may remain electrically connected to the resonance capacitor (C) regardless of the movement of the core body (11).

The contacts CP13 and CP14 may be located on the fixing member 119 or the capacitor unit 13. The contacts CP13 and CP14 may each be electrically connected to both ends of at least one resonance capacitor C. The contacts CP13 and CP14 may also be electrically connected to both ends of the coil 116, respectively. The contact CP14 may also be electrically connected to the other end of the additional capacitor Cp.

Contacts CP15 and CP16 may be located on the movable portion 121 of the switching member 120. Contact CP15 may be electrically connected to contact CP13 through wire W13. The contact CP16 may be electrically connected to the contact CP11 through a wire W21. Accordingly, the contact CP15 may be electrically connected to one end of the coil 116, and the contact CP16 may be electrically connected to one end of the additional capacitor Cp.

The contacts CP11, CP13, CP14, CP15, and CP16 may be implemented in various forms capable of electrical connection, such as conductive pads, conductive tabs, and conductive bars (eg, metal bars).

The contact structure CP50 may perform a function of switching the electrical connection between one end of the additional capacitor Cp and one end of the coil 116. The contact structure CP50 may include a connection portion 150 that electrically connects the two conductive contacts CP51 and CP52.

One end of the contact CP51 is located on the fixing part 122 of the switching member 120, and the other end may extend in the Z-axis direction. Contact (CP51) can optionally be electrically connected to contact (CP15). The contact CP51 may be electrically connected to the contact CP15 when the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 come into contact. The electrical connection between the contact CP51 and the contact CP15 may be interrupted when the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 are separated. Accordingly, the contact CP51 may be selectively electrically connected to one end of the coil 116 according to the movement of the movable part 121.

One end of the contact CP52 is located on the fixing part 122 of the switching member 120, and the other end may extend in the Z-axis direction. Contact (CP52) can optionally be electrically connected to contact (CP16). The contact CP52 may be electrically connected to the contact CP16 when the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 come into contact. The electrical connection between the contact CP52 and the contact CP16 may be interrupted when the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 are separated. Accordingly, the contact CP52 may be selectively electrically connected to one end of the additional capacitor Cp according to the movement of the movable part 121.

The connection part 150 is located in the fixing part 122 of the switching part 120 and can electrically connect the contacts CP51 and CP52.

Due to the above-described structure, the stylus pen 10k is positioned between one end of the additional capacitor Cp and one end of the coil 116 depending on whether there is contact between the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 of the switching member 120. The electrical connection of can be switched.

Referring to (a) of FIG. 45, when the core body 11 is not in contact with the touch screen 20 ('Hover' state), the movable part 121 can remain in contact with the fixed part 122. there is. Therefore, the electrical connection between the contacts CP15 and CP16 of the movable part 121 and the contact structure CP50 of the fixed part 122 is maintained, so that both ends of the additional capacitor Cp are connected to the positive electrode of the coil 116. It can be electrically connected to the terminal.

Referring to (b) of FIG. 45, when pen pressure is applied to the stylus pen 10k ('Pressure' state) while one end of the core 11 is in contact with the touch screen 20, the core 11 is It can move in the Z-axis direction depending on the pen pressure. Accordingly, the movable part 121 and the magnetic body 117 can also move in the Z-axis direction by the distance the core body 11 moves. When the movable part 121 moves toward the elastic member 118 by pressure of the pen, the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 are spaced apart from each other, and the contacts CP15 and CP16 of the movable part 121 and the fixed part 122 The electrical connection between the contact structures (CP50) may be released. Accordingly, one end of the additional capacitor Cp can be separated from the coil 116.

In the stylus pen 10k of FIG. 45, both ends of each wire W13 and W21 may be joined to the corresponding contacts CP13 and CP15, or CP11 and CP16, by soldering. Additionally, both ends of the coil 116 may be joined to the corresponding contacts CP13 and CP14 by soldering. Accordingly, in the stylus pen 10k, for electrical connection between the capacitor portion 13 (resonant capacitor C and additional capacitor Cp) and the inductor portion 14 (coil 116), five contacts are used. Soldering work may be required on (CP11, CP13, CP14, CP15, CP16).

Above, a pen and touch input system including a touch input device capable of interacting with a stylus pen according to various embodiments or embodiments shown in FIGS. 1 to 45 described above will be described.

Figure 46a is a conceptual diagram showing a pen and touch input system including a stylus pen and a touch input device.

Referring to Figure 46a, the stylus pen 10 receives (or uplinks) a signal output from the touch input device 2 or the touch screen 20 near the touch screen 20 of the touch input device 2. ), and can transmit (or downlink) a signal to the touch screen 20. Here, the touch input device 2 includes a sensor unit and a control unit that controls the sensor unit, and a stylus pen 10 and Because they are interactive, they can also be named ‘pen and touch input devices’.

FIG. 46B is a diagram for explaining uplink and downlink in the pen and touch input system shown in FIG. 46A.

Referring to the left drawing of FIG. 46B, in the uplink, electromotive force (V2, or Vemf) is formed in the coil inside the stylus pen 10 of FIG. 46A. Referring to the right drawing of FIG. 46B, in the downlink, electromotive force (V1, or Vemf) is formed in the sensor unit of the touch input device 20. That is, the coil inside the stylus pen and the sensor unit of the touch input device operate as transformers.

Figure 46b is a diagram to explain the gap between the + driving channel and - driving channel in the uplink.

Referring to Figure 46c, in the uplink, the spacing between the + driving channel and the - driving channel is optimal depending on the shape and location of the inductor inside the stylus pen. As a general stylus pen design standard, it is desirable to widen the gap between the + drive channel and the - drive channel by at least 1 channel (4 mm).

Figure 46d is a conceptual diagram showing another embodiment of a pen and touch input system including a stylus pen and a touch input device.

Referring to FIG. 46d, the touch input device 2 is foldable. The stylus pen 10 receives a signal output from the touch input device 2 or the touch screen 20 near the touch screen 20 of the foldable touch input device 2, and sends a signal to the touch screen 20. Can be sent.

In a member such as the rectangular foldable touch input device 2 or the touch screen 20 included therein, the long side located on the left in the plan view is the first long side LS1, and the long side located on the right is the second long side (LS1). LS2), the short side located above will be referred to as the first short side (SS1), and the short side located below will be referred to as the second short side (SS2).

The foldable touch input device 2 may be bent along a predetermined folding direction based on the folding axis AXIS_F crossing the first short side SS1 and the second short side SS2. That is, the foldable touch input device 2 may be capable of switching states between a folded state and an unfolded state along the folding direction based on the folding axis AXIS_F.

Figure 47a is a diagram schematically showing a signal transmission operation between a stylus pen and a touch input device.

Referring to (a) of FIG. 47A, the touch screen 20a includes a digitizer 29, a display panel 251, a sensor unit 21, and a window 22.

In the case of an EMR (Electro-Magnetic Resonance) type pen among passive stylus pens, when the digitizer 29 transmits a magnetic signal (B) to the EMR type stylus pen 10a, it is included in the stylus pen 10a. The resonant circuit resonates with the magnetic signal (B). Then, the digitizer 33 receives the resonated magnetic signal B from the stylus pen 10a.

The digitizer 29 may be attached below the display panel 251 and blocks the magnetic field generated by the FPCB (Flexible Printed Circuit Board) and the antenna loop formed with a plurality of conductive antenna loops, and the antenna loop blocks the magnetic field. It includes a ferrite sheet that blocks eddy currents that may be generated in other electrical devices and components when forming.

The FPCB consists of multiple antenna loops in multiple layers to detect the location where the resonance signal is input. One antenna loop has a form that overlaps with at least one other antenna loop in the Z-axis direction. As a result, the thickness of the FPCB is thick. Therefore, when using the digitizer 29, it is difficult to make the touch input device 2 thin and compact.

When such a digitizer 29 is mounted on the foldable/flexible touch input device 2, when folding occurs, deformation may occur in the FPCB attached to the folded area. Stress is applied to the wiring member forming the antenna loop due to repeated folding, which may ultimately result in damage to the wiring member. The ferrite sheet blocks the influence of the magnetic field generated by the antenna loop on the inside of the touch input device 2. The ferrite sheet is also thick, is prone to deformation when the touch input device 2 is folded, and can be damaged by repeated folding.

Referring to (b) of FIG. 47A, the touch screen 20c includes a display panel 251, a sensor unit 21, and a window 22.

In the case of the stylus pen 10 including a resonance circuit, when the electrode (or pattern) of the sensor unit 21 transmits the magnetic signal B to the stylus pen 10, the resonance circuit included in the stylus pen 10 resonates with the magnetic signal (B). Then, the electrode (or pattern) of the sensor unit 21 can receive the resonated electromagnetic signal (E and/or B) from the stylus pen 10. When the electrode (or pattern) of the sensor unit 21 is formed of a metal mesh with low resistance, it is possible to detect a magnetic signal from the stylus pen 10.

Likewise, compared to the digitizer 29, the touch screen 20c does not require an additional unit or module to transmit a magnetic signal to the stylus pen 10, so the touch screen 20b can be made thinner and can be manufactured. There are also advantages in terms of cost.

Referring to (c) of FIG. 47A, the touch screen 20b includes a loop coil 264, a display panel 251, a sensor unit 21, and a window 22.

In the case of the stylus pen 10 including a resonance circuit, when the loop coil 264 transmits a magnetic signal (B) to the stylus pen 10, the resonance circuit included in the stylus pen 10 transmits the magnetic signal (B). resonates with Then, the electrode (or pattern) of the sensor unit 21 can receive the resonated electromagnetic signal (E and/or B) from the stylus pen 10.

Compared to the digitizer 29, the loop coil 264 does not receive the magnetic signal B for detecting the touch position, so the wiring structure is simple and the touch screen 20b can be made thinner. As a result, the touch input device 2 can be made thinner and more compact. Additionally, since the loop coil 264 can be formed in various sizes and at various positions, this touch screen 20b can also be applied to the foldable/flexible touch input device 2.

The loop coil 264 may include a substrate on which the antenna loop is located and a ferrite sheet. The antenna loop may be formed from a conductive material such as copper, silver, etc. The antenna loop may be located on the same layer as the sensor unit 21 in addition to the substrate. In this case, the antenna loop may be formed of a conductive material exhibiting high transmittance and low impedance, such as metal mesh, ITO, graphene, silver nanowire, etc. You can. Additionally, the antenna loop may be located below the window, in which case the substrate may not be included in the loop coil 264.

In the above, the sensor unit 21 may include a plurality of electrodes (or patterns) for detecting touch coordinates. For example, the sensor unit 21 includes a plurality of first touch electrodes for detecting touch coordinates in a first direction and a plurality of second touch electrodes for detecting touch coordinates in a second direction intersecting the first direction. It can be included. In FIG. 2, the sensor unit 21 is shown as one layer, but the first touch electrode and the second touch electrode may be located on different layers, may be located overlapping with each other, or may not be located overlapping with each other. Alternatively, a separate layer may be interposed between the first touch electrode and the second touch electrode, but is not limited thereto.

Referring to (d) of FIG. 47A, the touch screen 20d includes a display panel 251, a sensor unit 21, and a window 22.

In the case of the active stylus pen 10' including a resonance circuit, the resonance circuit included in the active stylus pen 10' is a power source within the active stylus pen 10' (for example, a battery for storing power (secondary It resonates using batteries (including batteries) and capacitors such as EDLC (electric double layered capacitor). Then, the electrode of the sensor unit 21 can receive the resonated electromagnetic signal (E and/or B) from the stylus pen 10'. When the electrode (or pattern) of the sensor unit 21 is formed of a metal mesh with low resistance, it is possible to detect a magnetic signal from the stylus pen 10'. The active stylus pen 10' may include a circuit that outputs an electromagnetic signal (E and/or B) having a predetermined frequency using a power source, as well as a resonance circuit to generate an electromagnetic signal. Additionally, the active stylus pen 10' may include both a resonance circuit and a circuit that outputs an electromagnetic signal (E and/or B) having a predetermined frequency.

The touch screen 20d can receive an electromagnetic signal from the stylus pen 10' without transmitting the magnetic signal to the stylus pen 10'. That is, the touch screen 20d does not require an additional unit or module to generate a signal to resonate the resonance circuit included in the stylus pen 10', so the touch screen 20d can be made thinner and more compact. , there are also advantages in terms of power consumption and manufacturing cost.

Next, referring to FIGS. 47B to 47D, the structure of the touch screen 20b in (b) of FIG. 47A will be described in detail.

FIG. 47B is a diagram schematically showing a partial stack structure of the touch input device of FIG. 46A.

Referring to FIG. 47B, the display panel 251 may include a circuit driving layer 2512 disposed on a substrate 2510. The circuit driving layer 2512 may include a circuit that drives the light emitting layer 2514 of the pixel that displays the image. For example, the circuit driving layer 2512 may include a plurality of thin film transistors and a capacitor.

A light emitting layer 2514 may be disposed on the circuit driving layer 2512. The light emitting layer 2514 may include an organic light emitting layer. The light emitting layer 2514 may emit light with various brightnesses depending on the driving signal transmitted from the circuit driving layer 2512.

A common electrode layer 2516 may be disposed on the light emitting layer 2514. The common electrode layer 2516 may have at least one opening in the form of a slit.

An encapsulation layer (not shown) may be disposed on the common electrode layer 2516. The encapsulation layer (not shown) may include an inorganic layer or a stacked layer of an inorganic layer and an organic layer. As another example, glass or an encapsulation film may be applied as an encapsulation layer (not shown).

A touch electrode layer 21 or a touch electrode may be disposed on the encapsulation layer (not shown). The touch electrode layer 21 is a layer that recognizes touch input and can perform the function of a touch member. The touch electrode layer 21 may include a plurality of touch areas and touch electrodes. Since the touch electrode layer 21 recognizes touch input from an object such as a finger or a stylus pen, it may also be called a 'sensor unit' or 'sensor layer'.

A polarizing layer 23 may be disposed on the touch electrode layer 21. The polarizing layer 23 may serve to reduce external light reflection. The polarizing layer 23 may be attached to the touch electrode layer 21 through an adhesive layer. The polarizing layer 23 may be omitted.

A protective layer 22 may be disposed on the polarization layer 23. The protective layer 22 may include, for example, a window member or a cover layer. The protective layer 22 may be attached to the polarizing layer 23 using an optically clear adhesive or the like.

A magnetic field shielding layer 24 may be disposed below the display panel 251. The magnetic field shielding layer 24 may include a ferrite sheet that blocks magnetic fields. In addition, the magnetic field shielding layer 24 may include ferrite powder adhered below the substrate 2510. The magnetic field shielding layer 24 may block eddy currents that may be generated in other electrical devices and components when the touch electrode layer 21 and/or the stylus pen 10 generate a magnetic field.

FIGS. 47C and 47D are diagrams schematically showing a partial stack structure of the touch input device of FIG. 46D.

The stacked structure of Figure 47c is the same as the stacked structure of Figure 47b, but when the foldable touch input device 2 is folded based on the folding axis (AXIS_F), a magnetic field is applied to the folding area (hereinafter referred to as folding area) (FA). A shielding layer 24 may be located.

Compared to the stacked structure of FIG. 47C, the stacked structure of FIG. 47D may have the magnetic field shielding layer 24 except for the folding area FA or one area included in the folding area FA. For example, the magnetic field shielding layer 24 includes a first sheet 24a located in the area between the folding area FA and the long side LS1, and a second sheet 24a located in the area between the folding area FA and the long side LS2. It may include a sheet 24b. The magnetic field shielding layer 24 may include a plurality of sheets in addition to the two sheets, and in this case, the magnetic field shielding layer 24 is an area excluding the folding area (FA) on the back of the display panel 251 or the folding area (FA). ) may be located in an area excluding part of the area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the touch input device 2 according to the embodiment will be described.

Figure 48 is a block diagram schematically showing a touch input device capable of interacting with a stylus pen.

As shown, the touch input device 2 includes a wireless communication unit 210, a memory 220, an interface unit 230, a power supply unit 240, a display unit 250, a touch unit 260, and a control unit ( 270), etc. may be included. The components shown in FIG. 48 are not essential for implementing a touch input device, so the touch input device described on this disclosure may have more or fewer components than the components listed above.

More specifically, among the above components, the wireless communication unit 210 is between the touch input device 2 and the wireless communication system, between the touch input device 2 and another touch input device 2, or between the touch input device 2 ) and may include one or more modules that enable wireless communication between the server and an external server. Additionally, the wireless communication unit 210 may include one or more modules that connect the touch input device 2 to one or more networks.

This wireless communication unit 210 may include a wireless Internet module 211 and a short-range communication module 212.

The wireless Internet module 211 refers to a module for wireless Internet access and may be built into the touch input device 2. The wireless Internet module 211 is configured to transmit and receive wireless signals in a communication network based on wireless Internet technologies. Wireless Internet technologies include, for example, WLAN (Wireless LAN), Wi-Fi (Wireless-Fidelity), Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) Direct, DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance), WiBro (Wireless Broadband), and WiMAX (Worldwide). Interoperability for Microwave Access), HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access), HSUPA (High Speed Uplink Packet Access), NR (New Radio), LTE (Long Term Evolution), LTE-A (Long Term Evolution-Advanced), etc. , the wireless Internet module 211 transmits and receives data according to at least one wireless Internet technology in a range including Internet technologies not listed above.

The short-range communication module 212 is for short-range communication and includes Bluetooth™, Radio Frequency Identification (RFID), Infrared Data Association (IrDA), Ultra Wideband (UWB), ZigBee, and NFC ( Near Field Communication), Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Direct, and Wireless USB (Wireless Universal Serial Bus) technology can be used to support short-distance communication. This short-range communication module 212 is between the touch input device 2 and a wireless communication system, between the touch input device 2 and a wireless communication capable device, or a touch input device ( 2) It can support wireless communication between the network and the network where the external server is located. The short-range wireless communication networks may be wireless personal area networks.

Here, the wireless communication-capable device is a mobile terminal (e.g., a smart phone, tablet PC, laptop) capable of exchanging data with (or interoperating with) the touch input device 2 according to the present invention. etc.) can be. The short-range communication module 212 may detect (or recognize) a wireless communication-enabled device capable of communicating with the touch input device 2 around the touch input device 2 . Furthermore, if the detected wireless communication-capable device is a device authenticated to communicate with the touch input device 2 according to an embodiment, the control unit 270 controls at least a portion of the data processed by the touch input device 2, It can be transmitted to a device capable of wireless communication through the short-range communication module 212. Accordingly, a user of a device capable of wireless communication can use the data processed by the touch input device 2 through the device capable of wireless communication.

Additionally, the memory 220 stores data supporting various functions of the touch input device 2. The memory 220 may store a plurality of application programs (application programs or applications) running on the touch input device 2, data for operating the touch input device 2, and commands.

The interface unit 230 serves as a passageway for various types of external devices connected to the touch input device 2. This interface unit 230 connects devices equipped with a wired/wireless headset port, an external charger port, a wired/wireless data port, a memory card port, and an identification module. It may include at least one of a port, an audio input/output (I/O) port, a video I/O port, and an earphone port.

The power supply unit 240 receives external power and internal power under the control of the control unit 270 and supplies power to each component included in the touch input device 2. This power supply unit 240 includes a battery, and the battery may be a built-in battery or a replaceable battery.

The display unit 250 displays (outputs) information processed by the touch input device 2. For example, the display unit 250 may display execution screen information of an application running on the touch input device 2, or UI (User Interface) and GUI (Graphic User Interface) information according to such execution screen information. there is.

The display unit 250 includes an LCD display (liquid crystal display), an OLED (organic light-emitting diode) display, an electronic ink display (e-ink display), a quantum-dot light emitting display, and a micro LED (light emitting diode). It may include a display, etc.

The display unit 250 includes a display panel 251 that displays an image, and a display controller 252 that is connected to the display panel 251 and supplies signals for displaying an image to the display panel 251. For example, the display panel 251 may include a plurality of pixels connected to signal lines such as a plurality of scan lines and a plurality of data lines, a scan driver/receiver that supplies scan signals to the scan lines, and a display controller ( 252) may include a data driving IC that generates a data signal applied to the data line, a timing controller that processes the image signal to control the overall operation of the display unit 250, and a power management IC.

The touch unit 260 detects a touch (or touch input) applied to the touch area using a predetermined method, for example, a capacitive method. As an example, the touch unit 260 may be configured to convert changes in capacitance, voltage, or current that occur in a specific area into an electrical input signal. The touch unit 260 may be configured to detect the position, area, and capacitance at the time of touch of a touch object touching the touch area. Here, the touch object is an object that applies a touch to the touch screen, for example, a user's body part (finger, palm, etc.), a passive or active stylus pen 10, etc. It can be. Alternatively, it may be any of the stylus pens shown in FIGS. 1 to 45 .

The touch unit 260 applies a driving signal to the touch panel 261 and the touch panel 261 including the sensor unit 21 of FIGS. 47A to 47D, receives a detection signal from the touch panel 261, and operates the control unit. 270 and/or a touch controller 262 that transmits touch data to the display controller 252. The touch panel 261 may include a sensor unit capable of sensing a touch input from a finger or a stylus pen. The sensor unit may include multiple patterns (or electrodes). The sensor unit can sense an object such as a finger or a stylus pen and drive the stylus pen. The specific sensor unit will be described in detail in FIG. 16 and below.

The touch controller 262 is a first driving/receiving unit that is connected to at least one of the plurality of first touch electrodes of the sensor unit 21 of FIGS. 47A to 47D to apply a driving signal and receive a detection signal, and a plurality of second A second driving/receiving unit connected to at least one of the touch electrodes to apply a driving signal and receive a detection signal, and controlling the operations of the first driving/receiving unit and the second driving/receiving unit, and the first and second driving/receiving units It may include an MCU (micro control unit) that acquires the touch position using a detection signal output from.

The touch controller 262 may be integrated into one IC with the control unit 270, which will be described later, or may be integrated into one IC with the display controller 252. Alternatively, the touch controller 262 may be integrated with the display controller 252 and the control unit 270 into one IC. The touch controller 262 and the control unit 270, or the touch controller 262 and the display controller 252, or the touch controller 262, the display controller 252, and the control unit 270 are integrated into one and named 'control unit'. It can be.

The display panel 251 and the touch panel 261 may form a mutual layer structure or be formed as one piece, and may be referred to as a touch screen 20.

The control unit 270 controls the operation of the touch input device 2 and can output touch coordinate information in response to a touch detection result of the touch input device 2. Additionally, the control unit 270 may change the frequency of the driving signal in response to the touch detection result.

In addition to operations related to the application program, the control unit 270 typically controls the overall operation of the touch input device 2. The control unit 270 can provide or process appropriate information or functions to the user by processing signals, data, information, etc. input or output through the components discussed above, or by running an application program stored in the memory 220.

Additionally, the control unit 270 may control at least some of the components examined with FIG. 48 in order to run an application program stored in the memory 220. Furthermore, the control unit 270 may operate at least two of the components included in the touch input device 2 in combination with each other in order to drive the application program.

Although it has been described above that the touch unit 260 is included in the touch input device 2 together with the display unit 250, the touch input device 2 may include only the touch unit 260.

Below, before explaining in detail the touch input device in the pen and touch input system according to the embodiment of the present invention, the reason why the output voltage (Vout) of CVA (Capacitor Voltage Amplitude) varies depending on the position of the stylus pen on the touch screen is explained. Explain.

Figure 49 is a schematic diagram to explain that the output voltage (Vout) of CVA (Capacitor Voltage Amplitude) varies depending on the position of the stylus pen 10 on a conventional touch screen.

Referring to FIG. 49, the reason why the output of the CVA varies depending on the position of the stylus pen 10 on the touch screen is that the impedance ratio on both sides of the sensing line around the stylus pen 10 varies. .

Based on the long axis of a conventional touch screen, the resistance (R) of the metal mesh touch sensor is approximately 1.2k (ohm), and the capacitor (C) is approximately 250pF.

Based on 10 distributed models, at a driving frequency of 300kHz, the impedance of the capacitor is approximately 200 times that of the resistor (120 (ohm) vs. 1/(2π*300k*25pF) = 21k (ohm) )) It's bigger. Therefore, capacitors are the main cause.

Figure 50 is a diagram for explaining through current sensing that the output voltages (Vout1, Vout2) of the CVA are different depending on the position of the stylus pen 10 in Figure 49, and Figure 51 is a diagram showing the stylus pen ( 10) This is a diagram to explain through voltage sensing that the output voltages (Vout1, Vout2) of the CVA are different depending on the position.

Referring to Figures 50 and 51, the output voltage of the CVA varies depending on the position of the stylus pen 10 on the sensing line. That is, the closer the stylus pen 10 is to the sensing circuit unit 50, the larger the output voltage of the CVA is, and the farther away the stylus pen 10 is from the sensing circuit unit 50, the smaller the output voltage of the CVA is.

Hereinafter, a touch input device according to various embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail through the attached drawings.

Figure 52 is a schematic configuration diagram of the sensor unit 100 of the touch input device according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

The touch input device according to the first embodiment of the present invention may be a portrait type touch input device. This portrait-type touch input device has a width that is smaller than the height, and a control unit (not shown) that controls the sensor unit 100 may be placed below the sensor unit 100. For example, this touch input device corresponds to the shape of a smartphone.

The sensor unit 100 can not only detect the position of an object such as a finger located on the screen, but also drive the stylus pen 10 shown in FIG. 46A located on the screen, and can detect the position of an object such as a finger located on the screen. By detecting a signal (stylus pen signal), the position of the stylus pen located on the screen can be detected.

The sensor unit 100 includes multiple patterns (or multiple electrodes).

The sensor unit 100 may include a plurality of first to fourth patterns 101, 102, 103, and 104.

The first pattern 101 has a shape extending along an arbitrary first direction (y). The first direction may be the long axis direction of the screen of the touch input device. The first pattern 101 may also be named ATX (Active TX). The first pattern 101 may have a predetermined shape with an electrical path formed along an arbitrary first direction (y).

The second pattern 102 has a shape extending along the first direction (y), is disposed adjacent to the first pattern 101, and is disposed at a predetermined distance from the first pattern 101. The second pattern 102 may also be called Dummy TX (DTX). The second pattern 102 may be adjacent to the first pattern 101 and may have a predetermined shape with an electrical path formed along the first direction (y).

The third pattern 103 has a shape extending along a second direction (x) different from the first direction. The second direction (x) may be perpendicular to the first direction (y) and may be a short-axis direction of the screen of the touch input device. The third pattern 103 may also be named ARX (Active RX). The third pattern 103 may have a predetermined shape with an electrical path formed along an arbitrary second direction (x).

The fourth pattern 104 has a shape extending along the second direction (x), is disposed adjacent to the third pattern 103, and is disposed at a predetermined distance from the third pattern 103. The fourth pattern 104 may also be named DRX (dummy RX). The fourth pattern 104 may have a predetermined shape in which an electrical path is formed along the second direction (x) adjacent to the third pattern 103.

The third and fourth patterns 103 and 104 are disposed on the first and second patterns 101 and 102 and are spaced apart from the first and second patterns 101 and 102 by a predetermined distance. Meanwhile, the sensor unit in which the first to fourth patterns are disposed on the same layer will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 66 to 67.

The plurality of first patterns 101 are arranged along the second direction (x), and the plurality of second patterns 102 are also arranged along the second direction (x). The plurality of third patterns 103 are arranged along the first direction (y), and the plurality of fourth patterns 104 are also arranged along the first direction (y).

The first pattern 101 extends along the first direction (y) and the third pattern 103 extends along the second direction (x), with the first direction (y) extending further than the second direction (x). Because it is long, the number of first patterns 101 is less than the number of third patterns 103. Accordingly, the number of channels of the first plurality of patterns 101 is less than the number of channels of the third plurality of patterns 103.

Here, the number of first patterns 101 and the number of third patterns 103 may increase or decrease depending on the size of the screen of the touch input device.

The plurality of second patterns 102 may correspond one-to-one with the plurality of first patterns 101 and may be configured in the same number. Other ends (or second ends) of each of the plurality of second patterns 102 are electrically connected to each other through a conductive pattern. Here, the conductive pattern may be metal mesh or silver trace.

One end (or first end) of the plurality of second patterns 102 may be electrically connected to a control unit (not shown). Here, as shown in FIG. 17, ends of two or more second patterns 102 among the plurality of second patterns 102 may be electrically connected to each other through a conductive pattern. Due to this configuration, the number of channels of the second plurality of patterns 102 can be reduced to half of the number of channels of the first plurality of patterns 101. Here, two or more of the plurality of second patterns 102 may be adjacent to each other.

Meanwhile, as shown in FIG. 54, each end of the plurality of second patterns 102 may be individually connected to one conductive pattern.

Again, referring to FIG. 52, since the plurality of third patterns 103 are arranged along the first direction (y), the number of third patterns 103 is greater than the number of first patterns 101. . Accordingly, the number of channels of the third plurality of patterns 103 is greater than the number of channels of the first plurality of patterns 101.

The plurality of fourth patterns 104 may correspond one-to-one with the plurality of third patterns 103 and may be configured in the same number. The other ends (or second ends) of each of the plurality of fourth patterns 104 are electrically connected to each other through a conductive pattern.

In the sensor unit 100 of the touch input device shown in FIG. 52, the plurality of first patterns 101 and the plurality of third patterns 103 basically sense the touch of an object such as a finger. To this end, the plurality of first patterns 101 operate as touch driving electrodes (TX electrodes) to which touch driving signals are applied, and the plurality of third patterns 103 operate as touch sensing electrodes (RX electrodes) to which touch sensing signals are received. , or a touch receiving electrode). Of course, it can work the other way too.

In order for the sensor unit 100 of the touch input device shown in FIG. 52 to drive and sense the stylus pen, a plurality of first to fourth patterns 101, 102, 103, and 104 are used in various ways. Can be used as a combination. Various combinations are shown in <Table 2> below. In <Table 2> below, '1' represents a plurality of first patterns 101, '2' represents a plurality of second patterns 102, '3 represents a plurality of third patterns 103, and '4' represents a plurality of first patterns 101. ' refers to the plurality of fourth patterns 104.

Referring to <Table 2> above, in various combinations (No. 1 to No. 32), a plurality of first patterns 101 and a plurality of third patterns 103 are used to detect the touch of an object such as a finger. It is used for sensing. Specifically, the first plurality of patterns 101 operate as touch driving electrodes, and the plurality of third patterns 103 operate as touch receiving electrodes. Of course, the opposite is also possible.

At least one or two of the first to fourth patterns 101, 102, 103, and 104 may operate as a stylus driving electrode for driving the stylus pen. At least one or two of the first to fourth patterns 101, 102, 103, and 104 may be used to form a current loop for driving the stylus pen. For example, the It may be any one of patterns 104. The stylus pen can be driven either by X-axis drive or Y-axis drive, or by both.

At least one or two of the first to fourth patterns 101, 102, 103, and 104 may operate as sensing electrodes that sense a stylus pen signal emitted from the stylus pen. For example, since both X-axis sensing and Y-axis sensing are required to sense a stylus pen signal, two of the first to fourth patterns 101, 102, 103, and 104 can be used. X-axis sensing may be one of a plurality of first patterns 101 and a plurality of second patterns 102, and Y-axis sensing may be one of a plurality of third patterns 103 and a plurality of fourth patterns ( 104).

In Table 2 above, ‘uplink signal size’ refers to the size of a driving signal for driving the stylus pen 10 of FIG. 46A. When comparing the size of the signal received by the stylus pen by applying the same stylus pen driving signal to each of the plurality of first patterns 101 and the plurality of second patterns 102, the plurality of second patterns 102 When the stylus pen driving signal is applied to the , the uplink signal is relatively larger than when the stylus pen driving signal is applied to the plurality of first patterns 101 .

This is because the other ends (or second ends) of the plurality of second patterns 102 are electrically connected, and when two or more second patterns to which a stylus pen driving signal is applied are appropriately selected, at least one current loop is formed. However, this is because the other ends (or second ends) of the plurality of first patterns 101 are not electrically connected to each other, so a current loop cannot be formed. When current flows through each first pattern 101, the RC of each first pattern 101 is charged, so that it flows from one end (or first end) of each first pattern 101 to the other end (or The closer you get to the second end, the less current flows. In addition, the stylus pen driving signal applied through the plurality of first patterns 101 is transmitted to the plurality of second patterns 101 in which a current loop is formed through capacitive coupling. In this case, the capacitive coupling This is because signal attenuation occurs.

Similarly, when the stylus pen driving signal is applied to the plurality of fourth patterns 104, the uplink signal is relatively larger than when the stylus pen driving signal is applied to the plurality of third patterns 103.

In Table 2 above, 'downlink signal size' refers to the size of the stylus pen signal received from the stylus pen 10 of FIG. 46A. When comparing the size of the signal by receiving the same stylus pen signal through a plurality of first patterns 101 and a plurality of second patterns 102, the stylus pen signal is received through a plurality of second patterns 102. In one case, the downlink signal is relatively larger than in the case where the stylus pen signal is received through the plurality of first patterns 101.

The reason is that the other ends (second side ends) of the plurality of second patterns 102 are electrically connected to form a current loop, but the plurality of first patterns 101 are electrically connected to the other ends (second side ends). ) are not electrically connected to each other, and in particular, the stylus pen signal is transmitted from the plurality of second patterns 101 in which a current loop is formed through capacitive coupling to the plurality of first patterns 101. This is because attenuation of the downlink signal occurs.

Likewise, when a stylus pen signal is received through a plurality of fourth patterns 104, the downlink signal is relatively larger than when a stylus pen signal is received through a plurality of third patterns 103.

In <Table 2> above, 'stylus additional channel' means whether an additional channel must be configured for the stylus pen in addition to touch sensing. When using a plurality of second patterns 102 or/and a plurality of fourth patterns 104 for driving or sensing of a stylus pen, an additional channel is required (see 'Usage' in <Table 2>). (marked with '). On the other hand, when driving or sensing a stylus pen using a plurality of first patterns 101 and/or third patterns 103 for touch sensing, an additional channel is not required (indicated as 'none' in <Table 2> )do.

Hereinafter, some examples of the various combinations (No. 1 to No. 32) in <Table 2> above will be described in detail below. Combinations not described herein will be fully understood by those skilled in the art through the detailed description below.

In No. 1, the plurality of first patterns 101 are used as a touch driving electrode for touch sensing of an object and as a stylus sensing electrode for detecting a stylus pen signal. The plurality of second patterns 102 are used as stylus driving electrodes to drive the stylus pen. The plurality of third patterns 103 are used as touch sensing electrodes for sensing the touch of an object and as stylus sensing electrodes for sensing a stylus pen signal. And, the plurality of fourth patterns 104 are electrically floating. Here, electrically floating means that the other ends (second side ends) of the plurality of fourth patterns 104 are only electrically connected to each other, and one end (first side end) of the plurality of fourth patterns 104 is electrically connected to each other. ends) may mean not connected to other components.

In the case of No. 1, since a plurality of second patterns 102 are used as stylus driving electrodes, the size of the uplink signal is relatively large. Since a plurality of first patterns 101 and a plurality of third patterns 103 are used as stylus sensing electrodes, the size of the downlink signal is relatively small. In addition, since the plurality of second patterns 102 are separately used as stylus driving electrodes, an additional separate channel is required for driving the stylus pen, but an additional channel for sensing the stylus pen is not necessary.

In No. 4, the plurality of first patterns 101 are used as touch driving electrodes for touch sensing of objects. The plurality of second patterns 102 are used as stylus driving electrodes for driving the stylus pen and as stylus sensing electrodes for sensing a stylus pen signal. The plurality of third patterns 103 are used as touch sensing electrodes for touch sensing of objects. And, the plurality of fourth patterns 104 are used as stylus sensing electrodes for sensing stylus pen signals.

In the case of No. 4, since a plurality of second patterns 102 are used as stylus driving electrodes, the size of the uplink signal is relatively large. Since a plurality of second patterns 102 and a plurality of fourth patterns 104 are used as stylus sensing electrodes, the size of the downlink signal is relatively large. In addition, since the plurality of second patterns 102 are separately used as stylus driving electrodes and stylus sensing electrodes, and the plurality of fourth patterns 104 are separately used as stylus sensing electrodes, separate additions for driving and sensing of the stylus pen are required. You need a channel.

In No. 8, the plurality of first patterns 101 are used as touch driving electrodes for touch sensing of objects. The plurality of second patterns 102 are used as stylus sensing electrodes to sense a stylus pen signal. The plurality of third patterns 103 are used as touch sensing electrodes for touch sensing of objects. Additionally, the plurality of fourth patterns 104 are used as stylus driving electrodes for driving the stylus pen and as stylus sensing electrodes for sensing stylus pen signals.

In the case of No. 8, since a plurality of fourth patterns 104 are used as stylus driving electrodes, the size of the uplink signal is relatively large. Since a plurality of second patterns 102 and a plurality of fourth patterns 104 are used as stylus sensing electrodes, the size of the downlink signal is relatively large. In addition, since the plurality of second patterns 102 are separately used as stylus sensing electrodes and the plurality of fourth patterns 104 are separately used as stylus driving electrodes and stylus sensing electrodes, separate additions for driving and sensing of the stylus pen are required. You need a channel.

In No. 12, the plurality of first patterns 101 are used as touch driving electrodes for touch sensing of objects. The plurality of second patterns 102 are used as stylus driving electrodes for driving the stylus pen and as stylus sensing electrodes for sensing a stylus pen signal. The plurality of third patterns 103 are used as touch sensing electrodes for touch sensing of objects. Additionally, the plurality of fourth patterns 104 are used as stylus driving electrodes for driving the stylus pen and as stylus sensing electrodes for sensing stylus pen signals.

In the case of No. 12, since a plurality of second and fourth patterns 102 and 104 are used as stylus driving electrodes, the size of the uplink signal is relatively large. Since a plurality of second patterns 102 and a plurality of fourth patterns 104 are used as stylus sensing electrodes, the size of the downlink signal is relatively large. In addition, since the plurality of second patterns 102 are separately used as stylus driving electrodes and stylus sensing electrodes, and the plurality of fourth patterns 104 are separately used as stylus driving electrodes and stylus sensing electrodes, driving and sensing of the stylus pen are performed. A separate additional channel is required for this.

In No. 13, the plurality of first patterns 101 are used as a touch driving electrode for touch sensing of an object, a stylus driving electrode for driving a stylus pen, and a stylus detection device for sensing a stylus pen signal. Used as an electrode. The plurality of third patterns 103 are used as touch sensing electrodes for sensing the touch of an object and as stylus sensing electrodes for sensing a stylus pen signal. And, the plurality of second and fourth patterns 102 and 104 are electrically floating.

In the case of No. 13, since a plurality of first patterns 101 are used as stylus driving electrodes, the size of the uplink signal is relatively small. Since a plurality of first patterns 101 and a plurality of third patterns 103 are used as stylus sensing electrodes, the size of the downlink signal is relatively small. In addition, since a plurality of first patterns 102 are used as stylus driving electrodes and stylus sensing electrodes and a plurality of third patterns 103 are used as stylus sensing electrodes, a separate additional channel for driving and sensing of the stylus pen is provided. It's unnecessary.

In No. 17, the plurality of first patterns 101 are used as a touch driving electrode for touch sensing of an object and as a stylus sensing electrode for sensing a stylus pen signal. The plurality of third patterns 103 are used as touch sensing electrodes for sensing the touch of an object, as stylus driving electrodes for driving a stylus pen, and as stylus sensing electrodes for sensing a stylus pen signal. And, the plurality of second and fourth patterns 102 and 104 are electrically floating.

In the case of No. 17, since a plurality of third patterns 103 are used as stylus driving electrodes, the size of the uplink signal is relatively small. Since a plurality of first patterns 101 and a plurality of third patterns 103 are used as stylus sensing electrodes, the size of the downlink signal is relatively small. In addition, since a plurality of first patterns 102 are used as stylus sensing electrodes and a plurality of third patterns 103 are used as stylus driving electrodes and stylus sensing electrodes, a separate additional channel for driving and sensing of the stylus pen is required. It's unnecessary.

In No. 21, the plurality of first patterns 101 are used as a touch driving electrode for touch sensing of an object, a stylus driving electrode for driving a stylus pen, and a stylus detection device for sensing a stylus pen signal. Used as an electrode. The plurality of third patterns 103 are used as touch sensing electrodes for sensing the touch of an object, as stylus driving electrodes for driving a stylus pen, and as stylus sensing electrodes for sensing a stylus pen signal. And, the plurality of second and fourth patterns 102 and 104 are electrically floating.

In the case of No. 21, since a plurality of first and third patterns 101 and 103 are used as stylus driving electrodes, the size of the uplink signal is relatively small. Since a plurality of first patterns 101 and a plurality of third patterns 103 are used as stylus sensing electrodes, the size of the downlink signal is relatively small. In addition, since the plurality of first patterns 102 are used as stylus driving electrodes and stylus sensing electrodes and the plurality of third patterns 103 are used as stylus driving electrodes and stylus sensing electrodes, a separate device for driving and sensing of the stylus pen is used. Additional channels are unnecessary.

Among the various combinations (No. 1 to No. 32) in <Table 2> above, for Nos. 1, 5, 9, 25, and 29, driving is 'Yes' in the column of 'Stylus additional channel', Sensing is ‘nothing.’ Nos. 1, 5, 9, 25, 29 use a plurality of first and third patterns (101, 103) to sense the stylus pen, and a plurality of second or/and fourth patterns (101, 103) to drive the stylus pen. 102, 104) are used. When driving the stylus pen, even if a plurality of second and/or fourth patterns 102 and 104 are used, it may be somewhat difficult to form a magnetic field for resonating the stylus pen, so as shown in FIG. 53, two or more neighboring patterns One end (first end) of the two patterns can be electrically connected. Likewise, one end (first side end) of two or more neighboring fourth patterns may be electrically connected. Configuring in this way has the advantage of reducing the number of additional channels for driving the stylus pen.

The control unit (not shown) controls the sensor unit 100.

Specifically, No. 1 to No. 1 in <Table 2> above. As shown at 32, the control unit (not shown) may be configured to apply a touch driving signal to the first plurality of patterns 101 and receive a touch detection signal to the third plurality of patterns 103.

The control unit (not shown) is numbered from No. 1 to No. 2 in <Table 2> above. As shown in 32, a stylus pen driving signal is applied to at least one pattern among the plurality of first patterns 101 to fourth patterns 104, and the plurality of first patterns 101 to fourth patterns 104 are applied. It may be for receiving a stylus pen detection signal with at least one pattern.

The control unit (not shown) is numbered from No. 13 to No. 1 in <Table 2> above. As shown in 32, it may be used to apply a stylus pen driving signal to at least one pattern among the plurality of first patterns 101 or the plurality of third patterns 103.

The control unit (not shown) is configured as No. 1-3, 5-7, 9-11, 13-15, 17-19, 21-23, 25-27, and 29-31 in <Table 2> above. It may be for receiving a stylus pen detection signal using at least one pattern among the plurality of first patterns 101 or the plurality of third patterns 103.

The control unit (not shown) uses at least one pattern among the plurality of second patterns 102 or the plurality of fourth patterns 104, as shown in Nos. 1-12 and 25-32 in <Table 2> above. It may be for applying a stylus pen driving signal.

The control unit (not shown) is the above, as shown in Nos. 2-4, 6-8, 10-12, 14-16, 19-20, 22-24, 26-28, and 30-32 in <Table 2> above. It may be for receiving a stylus pen detection signal using at least one pattern among the plurality of second patterns 102 or the plurality of fourth patterns 104.

The control unit (not shown) selects at least one pattern among the plurality of first patterns 101 to fourth patterns 104 as a pen driving electrode and sends a stylus pen driving signal to the selected pen driving electrode. It may be to obtain approval. Here, selecting at least one pattern among the plurality of first patterns 101 to fourth patterns 104 as the pen driving electrode is performed on the touch screen 20 of the touch input device 2 in FIG. 46A. It may vary depending on the position of the stylus pen 10. The pattern selected when the stylus pen is in a hover state may be different from the pattern selected when the stylus pen is in a contact state. For example, when the stylus pen is in a hover state, the control unit (not shown) selects one of the first and second patterns 101 and 102 as the pen driving electrode, and when the stylus pen is in a contact state, Any one of the third and fourth patterns 103 and 104 can be selected as the pen driving electrode. Of course, the opposite case is also possible.

The control unit (not shown) selects at least two patterns among the plurality of first patterns 101 to fourth patterns 104 as pen sensing electrodes, and transmits a signal from the stylus pen through the selected pen sensing electrodes. This may be to sense an emitted stylus pen signal. Here, selecting at least two patterns among the plurality of first patterns 101 to fourth patterns 104 as pen sensing electrodes is performed on the touch screen 20 of the touch input device 2 in FIG. 46A. It may vary depending on the position of the stylus pen 10. The pattern selected when the stylus pen is in a hover state may be different from the pattern selected when the stylus pen is in a contact state. For example, when the stylus pen is in a hover state, the control unit (not shown) selects one of the first and second patterns 101 and 102 as the pen sensing electrode, and when the stylus pen is in a contact state, Any one of the third and fourth patterns 103 and 104 can be selected as the pen sensing electrode. Of course, the opposite case is also possible.

Figure 55 is a schematic configuration diagram of the sensor unit 100' of the touch input device according to the second embodiment of the present invention.

The touch input device according to the second embodiment of the present invention is a landscape type touch input device. This landscape-type touch input device has a width that is greater than the height, and a control unit (not shown) that controls the sensor unit 100' may be placed below the sensor unit 100'. For example, such a touch input device may correspond to the shape of a tablet PC.

The configuration of the sensor unit 100' of the touch input device according to the second embodiment of the present invention is the same as the configuration of the sensor unit 100 of the touch input device according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 52, and only in the direction 90. It may also be the same as rotating.

The sensor unit 100' of the touch input device according to the second embodiment of the present invention includes a plurality of first to fourth patterns 101, 102, 103, and 104. The first pattern 101 and the second pattern 102 are arranged adjacent to each other and have a shape extending along one direction. Alternatively, the first pattern 101 and the second pattern 102 may have a predetermined shape with an electrical path formed along one direction. The third pattern 103 and the fourth pattern 104 are arranged adjacent to each other and have a shape extending in a direction different from the one direction. Alternatively, the third pattern 103 and the fourth pattern 104 may have a predetermined shape with an electrical path formed along the different directions. Other ends (second side ends) of the plurality of second patterns 102 are electrically connected to each other, and other ends (second side ends) of the plurality of fourth patterns 104 are also electrically connected to each other.

The sensor unit 100' of the touch input device according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 55 is composed of approximately 10 to 14 inches, which is the size of the screen of a landscape-type tablet PC, and has No. 100' in Table 2 above. When implemented as an example of .1, the number of total channels and the number of driving trace channels (TX Trace Channels) of the sensor unit 100' are roughly summarized in Table 3 below.

In <Table 3> above, the number of channels of Stylus TX is calculated by dividing the number of first patterns 101 by 2. This means that the number of the plurality of second patterns 102 is the same as the number of the plurality of first patterns 101, but as shown in FIG. 56, one end (first side end) of the plurality of second patterns 102 This is due to the fact that two adjacent ends are electrically connected to each other, reducing the number of channels by half.

In <Table 3> above, the number of TX trace channels is the sum of the number of channels in Finger TX and the number of channels in Stylus TX. The number of TX Trace channels is a major factor that determines the thickness of the width direction bezel of the touch input device according to the second embodiment. This is because, in the touch input device according to the second embodiment, the control unit (not shown) is disposed below (or above) the sensor unit 100'. As the number of TX Trace channels is reduced, the width-wise bezel thickness of the touch input device can be reduced.

On the other hand, there is no particular problem if the screen size of the touch input device shown in FIG. 55 is the size of the screen of a smartphone, for example, 6.9 inches, but the screen size of the touch input device shown in FIG. 55 is that of a tablet PC. When the screen size of 11 inches or 12.9 inches increases, the length of the first to fourth patterns 101, 102, 103, and 104 of the sensor unit 100' also increases, so that the sensor unit 100' The resistance and capacitance values increase. The increase in the resistance and capacitance values increases the operating frequency bandwidth of the touch drive signal applied to any one of the first or third patterns used as a touch drive electrode and the stylus drive signal for driving the stylus pen. Because it is narrowed, a problem may arise in which the operating frequency bandwidth required for the design is not obtained. In order to solve the above problem, it may be considered to reduce the resistance and capacitance values of the sensor unit 100', but there is a limit to reducing these values, and even if these values are reduced as much as possible, the above-mentioned problem is still not solved.

Additionally, the stylus pen signal received from the stylus pen and input to the control unit of the touch input device is also attenuated as the sensor unit 100' becomes larger. In particular, the stylus pen detection signal at the part of the first to fourth patterns 101, 102, 103, and 104 of the sensor unit 100' located furthest from the control unit is attenuated in the process of being transmitted to the control unit, thereby reducing the signal required for design. There is a problem in which the required voltage value cannot be output.

The above-mentioned problems are listed in Nos. 2 of <Table 2> above. A plurality of second patterns 102, such as examples 3, 4, 7, 8, 11, 12, 15, 16, 19, 20, 23, 24, 27, 28, 31, and 32, are used to sense a stylus pen signal. It can be used as a stylus pen sensing electrode, or as Nos. 2 in <Table 2> above. A plurality of fourth patterns 104, such as examples 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, and 32, are used to sense a stylus pen signal. This can be solved by using the stylus pen as a sensing electrode. In the above examples, since the plurality of second and fourth patterns 102 and 104 receive electromotive force directly through electromagnetic induction by the stylus pen, from the second pattern 102 to the first pattern 101 to the fourth pattern There is no signal attenuation through capacitive coupling from (104) to the third pattern (103).

As a specific example, the sensor unit 100' of the touch input device according to the second embodiment is composed of approximately 10 to 14 inches, which is the size of the screen of a landscape-type tablet PC, and has No. 100' in Table 2 above. When implemented in the example of 3, the number of total channels and the number of driving trace channels (TX Trace Channels) of the sensor unit 100' are summarized in Table 4 below.

In <Table 4> above, the number of channels of Stylus TX is equal to the number of second patterns 102. This means that the number of the plurality of second patterns 102 is equal to the number of the plurality of first patterns 101, and as shown in FIG. 57, each end of the plurality of second patterns 102 is individually one end. It is due to being connected to a conductive pattern.

In <Table 4> above, the number of TX trace channels is the sum of the number of channels in Finger TX and the number of channels in Stylus TX. The number of TX Trace channels is a major factor in determining the thickness of the short bezel of a touch input device. As the number of TX Trace channels is reduced, the bezel thickness of the short axis of the touch input device can be reduced.

The example of <Table 4> above has the disadvantage of slightly increasing the number of channels compared to <Table 3> above, but the pen from the stylus pen is transmitted through a plurality of second patterns 102 rather than a plurality of first patterns 101. Since the detection signal is received, there is an advantage that the voltage value of the stylus detection signal received by the control unit becomes larger. The present applicant confirmed through experiments that there is an advantage in that the voltage value of the stylus detection signal received by the control unit is approximately twice as large as in <Table 3>.

In addition, since each of the plurality of second patterns 102 consists of one channel, when the plurality of second patterns 102 are used as stylus driving electrodes (Stylus TX), the channel-to-channel Since the gap is reduced by half, there is an advantage in improving the resolution of the stylus drive.

As another specific example, the sensor unit 100' of the touch input device according to the second embodiment is configured to be about 10 to 14 inches, which is the size of the screen of a landscape-type tablet PC, and No. When implemented as an example of .8, the number of total channels and the number of driving trace channels (TX Trace Channels) of the sensor unit 100' are summarized in Table 5 below.

In <Table 5> above, the number of channels of Stylus TX is equal to the number of fourth patterns 104. This means that the number of the plurality of fourth patterns 104' is equal to the number of the plurality of third patterns 103, and as shown in FIG. 58, each end of the plurality of fourth patterns 104 is individually one. It is due to being connected to the conductive pattern of .

In <Table 5> above, the number of TX Trace channels is the same as the number of Finger TX channels. The number of TX Trace channels is a major factor in determining the thickness of the short bezel of a touch input device. As the number of TX Trace channels is reduced, the bezel thickness of the short axis of the touch input device can be reduced.

<Table 5> above has the disadvantage that the total number of channels is slightly increased compared to the example of <Table 3> above, but since the pen detection signal is received from the stylus pen through the plurality of fourth patterns 104, the control unit There is an advantage that the voltage value of the pen detection signal received is larger.

In addition, since each of the plurality of fourth patterns 104 consists of one channel, when the plurality of fourth patterns 104 are used as driving electrodes (Stylus TX), the channel-to-channel There is an advantage in that driving resolution is improved because the gap is reduced by half.

In addition, the number of TX trace channels can be reduced to 1/4 to 1/3 compared to the example in <Table 3> above, which has the advantage of reducing the thickness of the width direction bezel (B) of the touch input device.

FIG. 59 is a configuration diagram schematically showing another example of the sensor unit 100' shown in FIG. 55.

In the sensor unit 100'' of FIG. 59, each first pattern 101' includes at least two 1a patterns 101a and 1b patterns 101b, and each second pattern 102' It includes at least two second a patterns 101a and two second b patterns 101b. The plurality of third and fourth patterns 103 and 104 are the same as the sensor unit 100 of FIG. 55.

The first a pattern 101a and the first b pattern 101b are arranged along the extension direction of the first pattern 101'. The 2a pattern 102a and the 2b pattern 201b are arranged along the extension direction of the second pattern 102'.

Other ends of the plurality of second a patterns 102a are electrically connected, and other ends of the plurality of second b patterns 102b are electrically connected. Here, the other ends of the plurality of 2a patterns 102a and the other ends of the plurality of 2b patterns 102b face each other.

One end of the plurality of second a patterns 102a may be electrically connected to two or more neighboring second a patterns. One end of the plurality of 2b patterns 102b may also be electrically connected to two or more neighboring plurality of 2b patterns. Here, one end of the plurality of 2a patterns 102a and one end of the plurality of 2b patterns 102b may each be individually electrically connected to the conductive pattern as shown in FIG. 57.

As a specific example, the sensor unit 100'' shown in Figure 59 is composed of about 10 to 14 inches, which is the size of the screen of a landscape type tablet PC, and is an example of No. 1 in <Table 2> above. When configured, the number of total channels and the number of driving trace channels (TX Trace Channel) of the sensor unit 100'' are summarized in Table 6 below.

In <Table 6> above, the number of channels of Stylus TX is calculated by dividing the number of second patterns 102' by 2. This means that the number of second patterns 102' is equal to the number of first patterns 101', and the plurality of second patterns 102' are two adjacent second patterns electrically connected to each other. It is due to

In <Table 6> above, the number of TX trace channels is the sum of the number of channels in Finger TX and the number of channels in Stylus TX. The number of TX Trace channels is a major factor in determining the thickness of the width direction bezel of a touch input device. As the number of TX Trace channels is reduced, the bezel thickness of the short axis of the touch input device can be reduced.

<Table 6> above has the disadvantage of slightly increasing the number of channels compared to the example of <Table 3> above, but because the length of each first pattern (101') and second pattern (102') is reduced by half. , there is an advantage in that the operating frequency bandwidth of the touch driving signal applied to the touch driving electrode and the pen driving signal for driving the stylus pen can be expanded by reducing the resistance value and capacitance value of the sensor unit 100''.

FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating the touch input device shown in FIG. 56.

Referring to FIG. 60, the touch input device 500 may include a sensor unit 100A and a control unit 300 for controlling the sensor unit 100A.

The sensor unit 100A is an example of the sensor unit 100' shown in FIG. 56. Accordingly, the sensor unit 100A includes a plurality of first to fourth patterns 101A, 102A, 103A, and 104A.

The first pattern 101A has a shape extending along the first direction (width direction). The first direction may be the long axis direction (L) of the screen of the touch input device 500. The first pattern 101A may also be named ATX (Active TX).

The first pattern 101A may include a plurality of main pattern parts and a connection pattern part connecting two main pattern parts adjacent to each other among the plurality of main pattern parts. Here, the main pattern portion may have a diamond shape, but is not limited to this, and may have various shapes different from the connection pattern portion.

The first pattern 101A may have an opening inside which the second pattern 102A is disposed. The shape of the opening may correspond to the external shape of the first pattern 101A. The first pattern 101A may have a structure surrounding the second pattern 102A. The first pattern 101A is disposed at a predetermined distance from the second pattern 102A.

The second pattern 102A has a shape extending along the first direction, is disposed adjacent to the first pattern 101A, and is disposed at a predetermined distance from the first pattern 101A. The second pattern 102A may also be called Dummy TX (DTX).

The second pattern 102A is disposed inside the first pattern 101A.

The second pattern 102A may include a plurality of main pattern parts and a connection pattern part connecting two main pattern parts adjacent to each other among the plurality of main pattern parts. Here, the main pattern portion may have a diamond shape, but is not limited to this, and may have various shapes different from the connection pattern portion.

The main pattern portion of the second pattern 102A may have a shape corresponding to the main pattern portion of the first pattern 101A, and the connection pattern portion of the second pattern 102A may correspond to the connection pattern portion of the first pattern 101A. It may be a shape that becomes

The third pattern 103A has a shape extending along a second direction different from the first direction. The second direction may be perpendicular to the first direction and may be the short axis direction (S) of the screen of the touch input device. The third pattern 103A may also be named ARX (Active RX).

The third pattern 103A may include a plurality of main pattern parts and a connection pattern part connecting two main pattern parts adjacent to each other among the plurality of main pattern parts. Here, the main pattern portion may have a diamond shape, but is not limited to this, and may have various shapes different from the connection pattern portion.

The third pattern 103A may have an opening inside which the fourth pattern 104A is disposed. The shape of the opening may correspond to the external shape of the third pattern 103A. The third pattern 103A may have a structure surrounding the fourth pattern 104A. The third pattern 103A is disposed at a predetermined distance from the fourth pattern 104A.

The fourth pattern 104A has a shape extending along the second direction, is disposed adjacent to the third pattern 103A, and is disposed at a predetermined distance from the third pattern 103A. The fourth pattern 104A may also be named DRX (dummy RX).

The fourth pattern 104A is disposed inside the third pattern 103A.

The fourth pattern 104A may include a plurality of main pattern parts and a connection pattern part connecting two main pattern parts adjacent to each other among the plurality of main pattern parts. Here, the main pattern portion may have a diamond shape, but is not limited to this, and may have various shapes different from the connection pattern portion.

The main pattern portion of the fourth pattern 104A may have a shape corresponding to the main pattern portion of the third pattern 103A, and the connection pattern portion of the fourth pattern 104A may correspond to the connection pattern portion of the third pattern 103A. It may be a shape that becomes

The third and fourth patterns 103A and 104A are disposed on the first and second patterns 101A and 102A, and are disposed at a predetermined distance from the first and second patterns 101A and 102A. Meanwhile, the sensor unit in which the first to fourth patterns are disposed on the same layer will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 66 to 67.

Although not shown in the drawing, one end (first side end) of the plurality of first patterns 101A is electrically connected to the control unit 300, and the other end (second side end) is electrically open. do. Here, one end (the first side end) is relatively close to the control unit 300, and the other end (the second end) is relatively far from the control unit 300.

Although not shown in the drawing, each end of the plurality of first patterns 101A may be electrically connected to the control unit 300 through a conductive pattern. Conductive patterns connecting the plurality of first patterns 101A and the control unit 300 may be arranged inside the width direction bezel B of the touch input device 500.

One end (first end) of the plurality of second patterns 102A is electrically connected to the control unit 300 and the second conductive pattern after two adjacent ends are electrically connected to each other by the first conductive pattern. can be connected Other ends (second side ends) of the plurality of second patterns 102A are electrically connected to each other through conductive patterns. One end (the first side end) is relatively close to the control unit 300, and the other end (the second end) is relatively far from the control unit 300.

The second conductive patterns connecting the plurality of second patterns 102A and the control unit 300 may be arranged inside the width direction bezel B of the touch input device 500, as shown in FIG. 24. . Here, the second conductive patterns connecting the plurality of second patterns 102A and the control unit 300 include conductive patterns (not shown) connecting the plurality of first patterns 101A and the control unit 300. Together, they may be arranged inside the width direction bezel (B) of the touch input device 500.

When other ends of the plurality of second patterns 102A are electrically connected to each other, capacitances for each second pattern 102A are added, thereby reducing the total impedance. Accordingly, the same effect is achieved as if the other ends of the plurality of second patterns 102A are AC GND.

Meanwhile, although not shown in the drawing, other ends of the plurality of second patterns 102A that are electrically connected to each other may be grounded. In addition, although not shown in the drawing, other ends of the plurality of second patterns 102A may not be electrically connected to each other, and a predetermined capacitor may be connected to the other end of each second pattern 102A.

A plurality of first patterns 101A and a plurality of second patterns 102A may be disposed on the same layer. A plurality of first patterns 101A and a plurality of second patterns 102A can be formed on the same layer using a metal mesh.

One end (first side end) of the plurality of third patterns 103A is electrically connected to the control unit 300, and the other end (second side end) is electrically open. Here, one end (the first side end) is relatively close to the control unit 300, and the other end (the second end) is relatively far from the control unit 300. One end of the plurality of third patterns 103A may be electrically connected to the control unit 300 and each other through a conductive pattern.

One end (first side end) of the plurality of fourth patterns 104A may be electrically open. Here, the other ends (second side ends) of the plurality of fourth patterns 104A may be electrically connected in the same way as the plurality of second patterns 102A. Here, one end (the first side end) is relatively close to the control unit 300, and the other end (the second end) is relatively far from the control unit 300.

Meanwhile, although not shown in the drawing, other ends of the plurality of fourth patterns 104A that are electrically connected to each other may be grounded. Additionally, other ends of the plurality of fourth patterns 104A may not be electrically connected to each other, and a predetermined capacitor may be connected to the other end of each fourth pattern 104A.

The plurality of third patterns 103A and the plurality of fourth patterns 104A may be disposed on the same layer. A plurality of third patterns 103A and a plurality of fourth patterns 104A can be formed on the same layer using a metal mesh. Here, the plurality of third patterns 103A and the plurality of fourth patterns 104A may be disposed on different layers from the plurality of first patterns 101A and the plurality of second patterns 102A. For example, the plurality of third patterns 103A and the plurality of fourth patterns 104A are disposed on the first layer, and the plurality of first patterns 101A and the plurality of second patterns 102A are disposed on the first layer. It may be placed on a second floor different from the first floor. Meanwhile, the sensor unit in which the first to fourth patterns are arranged on the same layer will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 66 to 67.

The control unit 300 is electrically connected to the sensor unit 100A and can control the operation of the sensor unit 100A. The control unit 300 and the sensor unit 100A may be electrically connected to each other through a plurality of conductive patterns.

The control unit 300 may include a plurality of driving circuit units 310 and a plurality of sensing circuit units 330. Here, although not shown in separate drawings, at least one of the plurality of driving circuit units 310 and the plurality of sensing circuit units 330 is not included in the control unit 300 and may be disposed outside the control unit 300.

The plurality of driving circuit units 310 are a driving circuit unit that provides a touch driving signal for sensing the touch position of an object such as a finger to the plurality of first patterns 101A and a pen driving signal for driving a stylus pen. It may include a circuit part.

The plurality of sensing circuit units 330 may include a sensing circuit part for detecting a touch position of an object such as a finger by receiving a detection signal through the plurality of third patterns 103A and a sensing circuit part for sensing a stylus pen. Here, some of the plurality of sensing circuit units may perform touch position sensing and stylus pen sensing.

The control unit 300 may control the sensor unit 100A to operate in any one of a touch driving/sensing mode, an antenna driving mode, and a stylus pen sensing mode. The control unit 300 can control a plurality of driving/ sensing circuit units 310 and 330 by selectively electrically connecting them to the sensor unit 100A according to each mode. To this end, the control unit 300 may include a plurality of switches that electrically connect the plurality of driving/ sensing circuit units 310 and 330 and the sensor unit 100A according to commands of the control unit 300.

The operation mode of the touch input device 500 shown in FIG. 60 will be described in detail. Here, Figure 60 is shown as an example of No. 1 in Table 2 above, and will be described based on this.

In the touch driving/sensing mode, the control unit 300 can electrically connect a plurality of driving circuit units 310 to the plurality of first patterns 101A of the sensor unit 100A to sense the touch position of an object such as a finger. there is. The control unit 300 may control a plurality of switches to electrically connect the conductive patterns connected to the plurality of first patterns 101A with the plurality of driving circuit units 310.

Additionally, the control unit 300 may electrically connect a plurality of sensing circuit units 330 for touch position sensing to a plurality of third patterns 103A of the sensor unit 100A. The control unit 300 may control a plurality of switches to electrically connect the conductive patterns connected to the plurality of third patterns 103A with the plurality of sensing circuit units 330.

In this touch driving/sensing mode, the control unit 300 simultaneously or sequentially applies a driving signal (or touch driving signal) for touch sensing to a plurality of first patterns 101A and a plurality of third patterns (101A). A detection signal (or touch detection signal) received from 103A) is received. A plurality of sensing circuits of the control unit 300 electrically connected to the plurality of third patterns 103A may output capacitance change amount information included in the input sensing signal as a predetermined voltage value. The control unit 300 may detect the touch position by processing the output voltage value.

Meanwhile, in the touch driving/sensing mode, the control unit 300 uses a plurality of A plurality of driving circuit units 310 may be electrically connected to the second patterns 102A. At this time, the control unit 300 may control the same driving signal as the driving signal applied to the plurality of first patterns 101A to be applied to the plurality of second patterns 102A. Alternatively, the control unit 300 may control such that when a driving signal is applied to the plurality of first patterns 101A, a predetermined reference potential is applied to the plurality of second patterns 102A.

In the antenna driving mode (or stylus driving mode, or stylus uplink mode), the control unit 300 connects a plurality of driving circuit units 310 for antenna driving to the plurality of second patterns 102A of the sensor unit 100A. It can be connected electrically. The control unit 300 may control a plurality of switches to electrically connect the conductive patterns connected to the plurality of second patterns 102A with the plurality of driving circuit units 310.

The control unit 300 may control a driving signal (or pen driving signal) output from each driving circuit unit 310 connected to the plurality of second patterns 102A. For example, the control unit 300 controls the first driving circuit unit to output a pulse signal of a predetermined frequency among the plurality of driving circuit units 310 connected to the plurality of second patterns 102A, and controls the second driving circuit unit to output any pulse signal. Pulse signals can also be controlled not to be output, and the third driving circuit unit can be controlled to output an inverted pulse signal whose phase is opposite to that of the pulse signal output from the first driving circuit unit. In this case, a current loop is formed with a second pattern electrically connected to the first driving circuit and a second pattern electrically connected to the third driving circuit. A magnetic field is generated by the formed current loop, and a stylus pen close to the sensor unit 100A can be driven by the magnetic field.

The control unit 300 may control driving signals that conflict with each other to be output from any two driving circuit units among the plurality of driving circuit units 310 electrically connected to the plurality of second patterns 102A. Accordingly, the control unit 300 can change and set the size or location of the current loop in various ways. For example, when the control unit 300 detects the position of a stylus pen close to the sensor unit 100A, opposing pulse signals are output from the driving circuit unit electrically connected to the two second patterns around the position of the stylus pen. If the position of the stylus pen is not detected, opposing pulse signals are output from the driving circuit electrically connected to the two second patterns located on the outermost sides of the plurality of second patterns 102A. You can control it as much as possible.

FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating a method by which the control unit 300 of FIG. 60 applies a pen driving signal for driving a stylus pen to a plurality of second patterns 102A. For reference, in FIG. 61, one second pattern 102A shown in FIG. 60 is briefly shown as one line (Ch), and each line (Ch) serves as one channel.

As shown in FIG. 61, two adjacent second patterns are electrically connected to form one channel. In this configuration, the same signal is applied to the two electrically connected second patterns at the same time. Figure 61 shows 42 channels (Ch0, Ch1,...Ch41) by connecting 84 second patterns two by two.

For example, when the stylus pen 50 is located between the second channel (Ch2) and the third channel (Ch3) among 42 channels (Ch0, Ch1,...Ch41), the control unit 300 controls the stylus pen 50. The pen driving signal is controlled to be output through one or more channels located on the second channel (Ch2) side with respect to the pen 50, and one or more channels located on the third channel (Ch3) side with respect to the stylus pen 50. A pen driving signal having an inverted phase of the pen driving signal can be controlled to be output.

In the stylus sensing mode (or stylus downlink mode), the control unit 300 connects a plurality of detection circuit units 330 for stylus sensing to a plurality of first patterns 101A and a plurality of third patterns of the sensor unit 100A. It can be electrically connected to (103A). The control unit 300 may control a plurality of switches to electrically connect the conductive patterns connected to the plurality of first patterns 101A and the plurality of third patterns 103A with the plurality of sensing circuit units 330.

The touch input device 500 according to an embodiment of the present invention determines the output voltage of the plurality of sensing circuit units 330 according to the position of the stylus pen on the sensor unit 100A in the stylus sensing mode by the configuration of the sensor unit 100A. It has the advantage that the value rarely changes. The specific principle for this will be explained with reference to (a) to (f) of FIG. 62.

Figures 62 (a) to (f) are diagrams for schematically explaining the operation principle of the stylus sensing mode of the touch input device of Figure 60.

Figure 62 (a) is a circuit diagram schematically modeling one of the first patterns 101A shown in Figure 60 and the sensing circuit unit 330 of the control unit 300 electrically connected thereto, and Figure 62 (b) is a circuit diagram schematically modeling the second pattern 102A disposed inside one of the first patterns 101A. Figure 62(c) is a voltage distribution graph in the circuit diagram of Figure 62(a), and Figure 62(d) is a voltage distribution graph in the circuit diagram of Figure 62(b).

Referring to (a) and (c) of FIGS. 62, when the stylus pen approaches a random point A that is as far away as possible from the sensing circuit unit 330 on the first pattern 101A, the stylus pen emitted from the stylus pen at that point A A voltage (Vemf, hereinafter referred to as 'induced voltage') induced by the signal is generated. When an induced voltage (Vemf) is generated at point A, the equivalent capacitance of the first pattern 101A viewed from point A to the left decreases, and thus the equivalent impedance increases. Therefore, most of the induced voltage (Vemf) is applied to the left side of point A, and a voltage close to 0 (V) is applied to the right side of point A, so that almost no current flows. In addition, the voltage close to 0 (V) on the right side of point A gradually decreases due to the equivalent resistances of the first pattern 101A, so that almost no voltage is applied to the input terminal of the sensing circuit unit.

Referring to (b) and (d) of FIGS. 62, when an induced voltage (Vemf) is generated at point A, the left side of point A is at point A because the other ends of each second pattern 102A are electrically connected to each other. The equivalent capacitance looking to the left increases, so the equivalent impedance approaches almost 0. Accordingly, 0 (V) is applied to the left side of point A, and one end of the second pattern 102A is open to the right side of point A, so that no voltage drop occurs in the equivalent resistances and Vemf is applied as is.

Comparing (c) and (d) of Figure 62, it can be confirmed that a potential difference equal to Vemf exists between the first pattern 101A and the second pattern 102A at any position. A potential difference equal to Vemf between the first pattern 101A and the second pattern 102A causes capacitive coupling between the first pattern 101A and the second pattern 102A. Due to the capacitive coupling, current flows from the second pattern 102A to the first pattern 101A, as shown in (e) of FIG. 62. As the position of the stylus pen moves away from the sensing circuit unit 330 of the control unit 300, the current generated from the first pattern 101A itself gradually decreases, but from the second pattern 102A to the first pattern 101A. Because current flows in, the current output from the first pattern 101A to the sensing circuit unit 330 of the control unit 300 has little difference from the position of the pen. Accordingly, the control unit 300 can detect the position of the stylus pen through the sensing circuit unit 330 electrically connected to the first pattern 101A.

And, as can be seen from (a) to (e) of Figure 62, even if point A moves to the left or right, the potential difference between the first pattern (101A) and the second pattern (102A) is constant as Vemf. You can. Accordingly, the control unit 300 can sense the stylus pen from a constant signal output from the detection circuit unit 330, regardless of whether the position of the stylus pen on the sensor unit 100A is close to or far from the detection circuit unit.

Meanwhile, in the description of (e) of FIG. 62, the current flowing from the second pattern 102A to the first pattern 101A is explained as being due to capacitive coupling, but it is not limited thereto. For example, the current flowing from the second pattern 102A to the first pattern 101A can be achieved through magnetic coupling (magnetic field coupling).

The principles of (a) to (e) of FIG. 62 described above are applied to any third pattern 103 and fourth pattern 104 in the second direction. In addition, the same applies to the touch input device according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 52.

FIG. 62(f) is a voltage distribution graph when the sensing circuit unit 330 is connected to the right open terminal of the modeled circuit diagram of the second pattern 102A shown in FIG. 62(b). That is, the voltage distribution graph in (f) of FIG. 62 illustrates a case where one end of the second pattern 102A is connected to the sensing circuit unit 330 of the control unit 300. Comparing Figures 62 (f) and (d), in Figure 62 (f), a voltage drop occurs due to equivalent resistances toward the right side of point A. Therefore, in the case of Figure 62(f), the potential difference equal to Vemf between the first pattern and the second pattern is not maintained as shown in Figure 62(e), so the current cannot pass from the second pattern to the first pattern. Therefore, as the position of the pen moves away from the control unit 300, the current output from the first pattern decreases. In the stylus sensing mode, it is desirable to open one end of the second pattern 102A and float it.

There is no particular problem if the screen size of the touch input device shown in FIG. 62 is the size of the screen of a smartphone, for example, 6.9 inches, but the screen size of the touch input device shown in FIG. 62 is the screen of a tablet PC. When the size increases to about 10 inches to 14 inches, the sensor unit 100A also increases, so the resistance and capacitance values of the sensor unit 100A increase. The increase in the resistance and capacitance values is designed so that the operating frequency bandwidth of the touch drive signal applied to the touch drive electrode and the pen drive signal for driving the stylus pen is much narrower than that of a smartphone (6.9 inches). There is a problem of not obtaining the required operating frequency bandwidth.

Additionally, the pen detection signal received from the stylus pen is also attenuated as the sensor unit 100A becomes larger. In particular, there is a problem in that the pen detection signal from the part of the sensor unit 100A located furthest from the control unit 300 is attenuated in the process of being transmitted to the control unit 300, so that the voltage value required for the design cannot be output.

Below, touch input devices that can solve the above-mentioned problems will be described.

FIG. 63 is a detailed diagram of the touch input device shown in FIG. 57.

Referring to FIG. 63, the touch input device 500'' may include a sensor unit 100A'' and a control unit 300 for controlling the sensor unit 100A''.

The sensor unit 100A'' includes a plurality of first to fourth patterns 101A, 102A'', 103A, and 104A. Here, the plurality of first, third and fourth patterns 101A, 103A and 104A are the same as the plurality of first, third and fourth patterns 101A, 103A and 104A shown in FIG. 60, so description thereof is omitted.

Hereinafter, the plurality of second patterns 102A'' will be described, but description of the same parts as the plurality of second patterns 102A of FIG. 60 will be omitted for convenience.

Each of one end (first side end) of the plurality of second patterns 102A'' may be electrically connected to the control unit 300 through a conductive pattern. This part is different from the second plurality of patterns 102A in FIG. 60.

Other ends (second side ends) of the plurality of second patterns 102A'' are electrically connected to each other through conductive patterns. One end is relatively close to the control unit 300, and the other end is relatively far from the control unit 300.

The operation mode of the touch input device 500'' shown in FIG. 63 will be described in detail.

In the touch driving/sensing mode, the control unit 300 electrically connects a plurality of driving circuit units 310 to the plurality of first patterns 101A of the sensor unit 100A'' to sense the touch position of an object such as a finger. You can do it. The control unit 300 may control a plurality of switches to electrically connect the conductive patterns connected to the plurality of first patterns 101A with the plurality of driving circuit units 310.

Additionally, the control unit 300 may electrically connect a plurality of sensing circuit units 330 for touch position sensing to a plurality of third patterns 103A of the sensor unit 100A''. The control unit 300 may control a plurality of switches to electrically connect the conductive patterns connected to the plurality of third patterns 103A with the plurality of sensing circuit units 330.

In this touch driving/sensing mode, the control unit 300 simultaneously or sequentially applies a driving signal (or touch driving signal) for touch sensing to a plurality of first patterns 101A and a plurality of third patterns (101A). A detection signal (or touch detection signal) received from 103A) is received. A plurality of sensing circuits of the control unit 300 electrically connected to the plurality of third patterns 103A may output capacitance change amount information included in the input sensing signal as a predetermined voltage value. The control unit 300 may detect the touch position by processing the output voltage value.

In the antenna driving mode (or stylus driving mode, or stylus uplink mode), the control unit 300 connects a plurality of driving circuit units 310 for antenna driving to a plurality of second patterns 102A' of the sensor unit 100A''. ') can be electrically connected to the The control unit 300 may control a plurality of switches to electrically connect the conductive patterns connected to the plurality of second patterns 102A'' with the plurality of driving circuit units 310.

The control unit 300 may control the driving signal (or pen driving signal) output from each driving circuit unit 310 connected to the plurality of second patterns 102A''. The control unit 300 may control pulse signals opposing each other to be output from any two driving circuit units 310 among the plurality of driving circuit units 310 electrically connected to the plurality of second patterns 102A''. Accordingly, the control unit 300 can change and set the size or location of the current loop in various ways.

In the stylus sensing mode (or stylus downlink mode), the control unit 300 connects a plurality of detection circuit units 330 for stylus sensing to a plurality of second patterns 101A'' of the sensor unit 100A'' and a plurality of second patterns 101A'' of the sensor unit 100A''. It can be electrically connected to the third patterns 103A. This part is different from the stylus sensing mode of the touch input device shown in FIG. 60.

The control unit 300 may control a plurality of switches to electrically connect the conductive patterns connected to the plurality of second patterns 101A'' and the plurality of third patterns 103A with the plurality of sensing circuit units 330. there is.

Compared to the touch input device shown in FIG. 60, the touch input device 500'' shown in FIG. 63 has a plurality of second patterns 102A'' of the sensor unit 100A'' and the control unit 300. There is a difference in the connection configuration. That is, in the plurality of second patterns 102A in FIG. 60, two adjacent second patterns are electrically connected by the first conductive pattern and then connected to the control unit 300 through the second conductive pattern, but in the plurality of second patterns 102A in FIG. 63 The second patterns 102A'' are each connected to the control unit 300 by a conductive pattern. Due to these structural features, the touch input device 500'' shown in FIG. 63 has a disadvantage in that the number of channels is increased compared to the touch input device 500 in FIG. 60, but in the antenna driving mode for driving the stylus pen, the stylus Since the pen driving signal can be applied only to a specific part where the pen is located, there is an advantage in reducing power consumption.

In addition, the touch input device 500 shown in FIG. 60 has a pattern for detecting a signal emitted from the stylus pen in the stylus sensing mode, a plurality of first patterns 101A in the long axis direction (L), and a plurality of first patterns 101A in the short axis direction (L). While (S) is a plurality of third patterns 103A, the touch input device 500'' shown in FIG. 63 has a pattern for detecting a signal emitted from the stylus pen in the stylus sensing mode, in the long axis direction. There are a plurality of second patterns 102A'' in (L), and a plurality of third patterns 103A in the minor axis direction (S).

In the touch input device 500'' shown in FIG. 63, the pattern in the long axis direction (L) for detecting the signal emitted from the stylus pen in the stylus sensing mode is divided into a plurality of first patterns 101A rather than a plurality of first patterns 101A. By using two patterns (102A''), compared to the touch input device 500 shown in FIG. 60, the coupling capacitance between the first pattern (101A) and the second pattern (102A'') can be reduced, The operating frequency bandwidth of the touch driving signal and touch detection signal for touch position sensing can be improved, and the operating frequency bandwidth of the pen driving signal for driving the stylus pen can be improved.

In addition, since the control unit 300 receives the pen detection signal from the stylus pen through the plurality of second patterns 102A'' in the stylus sensing mode, the voltage value of the received pen detection signal is relatively high. there is. In particular, in the long axis direction (L), the voltage value of the pen detection signal received at the point furthest from the control unit 300 is relatively larger than that in the case of FIG. 60, which has the advantage of improved sensing sensitivity. This is because capacitive coupling between the first pattern 101A and the second pattern 102A does not need to be considered. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 60, as described above in (e) of FIG. 62, the second pattern 102A is formed by capacitive coupling between the first pattern 101A and the second pattern 102A. Since current flows through the first pattern 101A, there is attenuation of the pen detection signal input to the control unit 300 through the first pattern 101A. However, the touch input device 500'' of FIG. 63 is directly input to the control unit 300 without capacitive coupling through the second pattern 102A'' rather than the first pattern 101A, so the capacitive There is no attenuation of the pen detection signal due to coupling.

In addition, since each of the plurality of second patterns 102A'' consists of one channel, when the plurality of second patterns 102A'' are used as the driving electrode (Stylus TX), the touch input device of FIG. 60 There is an advantage in that driving resolution is improved because the spacing between channels is reduced by half.

FIG. 64 is a detailed diagram of the touch input device shown in FIG. 58.

Referring to FIG. 64, the touch input device 500''' may include a sensor unit 100A''' and a control unit 300 for controlling the sensor unit 100A'''.

The sensor unit 100A''' includes a plurality of first to fourth patterns 101A, 102A''', 103A, and 104A'. Here, since the first and third patterns 101A and 103A are the same as the first and third patterns 101A and 103A shown in FIG. 60, their description will be omitted.

Hereinafter, the second and fourth patterns 102A''' and 104A' will be described, but descriptions of parts that are the same as the second and fourth patterns 102A and 104A of FIG. 60 will be omitted for convenience. do.

One end of the plurality of second patterns 102A''' may be floating, and other ends of the plurality of second patterns 102A''' may be electrically connected to each other through a conductive pattern. One end is relatively close to the control unit 300, and the other end is relatively far from the control unit 300.

One end of each of the fourth patterns 104A' is electrically connected to the control unit 300 through a conductive pattern, and the other ends of the fourth patterns 104A' are electrically connected to each other through a conductive pattern. One end is relatively close to the control unit 300, and the other end is relatively far from the control unit 300.

The operation mode of the touch input device 500''' shown in FIG. 64 will be described in detail.

In the touch driving/sensing mode, the control unit 300 electrically connects a plurality of driving circuit units 310 to the plurality of first patterns 101A of the sensor unit 100A''' to sense the touch position of an object such as a finger. It can be connected. The control unit 300 may control a plurality of switches to electrically connect the conductive patterns connected to the plurality of first patterns 101A with the plurality of driving circuit units 310.

Additionally, the control unit 300 may electrically connect a plurality of sensing circuit units 330 for sensing the touch position to a plurality of third patterns 103A of the sensor unit 100A'''. The control unit 300 may control a plurality of switches to electrically connect the conductive patterns connected to the plurality of third patterns 103A with the plurality of sensing circuit units 330.

In this touch driving/sensing mode, the control unit 300 simultaneously or sequentially applies a driving signal (or touch driving signal) for touch sensing to a plurality of first patterns 101A and a plurality of third patterns (101A). A detection signal (or touch detection signal) received from 103A) is received. A plurality of sensing circuits of the control unit 300 electrically connected to the plurality of third patterns 103A may output capacitance change amount information included in the input sensing signal as a predetermined voltage value. The control unit 300 may detect the touch position by processing the output voltage value.

In the antenna driving mode (or stylus driving mode, or stylus uplink mode), the control unit 300 connects a plurality of driving circuit units 310 for antenna driving to a plurality of fourth patterns 104A of the sensor unit 100A'''. ') can be electrically connected to the The control unit 300 may control a plurality of switches to electrically connect the conductive patterns connected to the plurality of fourth patterns 104A' with the plurality of driving circuit units 310.

The control unit 300 may control the driving signal (or pen driving signal) output from each driving circuit unit 310 connected to the plurality of fourth patterns 104A'. The control unit 300 may control pulse signals opposing each other to be output from any two driving circuit units 310 among the plurality of driving circuit units 310 electrically connected to the plurality of fourth patterns 104A'. Accordingly, the control unit 300 can change and set the size or location of the current loop in various ways.

In the stylus sensing mode (or stylus downlink mode), the control unit 300 connects a plurality of detection circuit units 330 for stylus sensing to a plurality of first patterns 101A and a plurality of first patterns 101A of the sensor unit 100A'''. It can be electrically connected to the fourth patterns 104A'. This part is different from the stylus sensing mode of the touch input device in Figure 60.

The control unit 300 controls a plurality of switches to electrically connect the conductive patterns connected to the plurality of first patterns 101A and the plurality of fourth patterns 104A' with the plurality of sensing circuit units 330. .

In the touch input device 500''' shown in FIG. 64, compared to the touch input device shown in FIG. 60, the plurality of second patterns 102A''' of the sensor unit 100A''' are electrically floating. The difference is that the stylus pen is driven through the plurality of fourth patterns 104A' rather than being used. Due to these structural features, the touch input device 500''' shown in FIG. 64 has a disadvantage in that the number of channels is increased compared to the touch input device 500 of FIG. 60, but a plurality of second patterns 102A are used. Since this does not occur, there is no conductive pattern connected to one end of the plurality of second patterns 102A. Therefore, there is an advantage in that the thickness of the left and right bezels (B) can be relatively significantly reduced compared to Figure 60.

The touch input device shown in FIG. 64 has the disadvantage of slightly increasing the total number of channels compared to the touch input device of FIG. 60, but directly receives a pen detection signal from the stylus pen through a plurality of fourth patterns 104A'. Therefore, there is an advantage that the voltage value of the pen detection signal received by the control unit 300 becomes larger. There is an advantage that the voltage value of the pen detection signal received by the control unit 300 of the touch input device of Figure 60 is approximately twice or more larger.

In addition, since each of the plurality of fourth patterns 104A' consists of one channel, when the plurality of fourth patterns 104A' are used as the driving electrode (Stylus TX), the channel is used more than the touch input device of FIG. 60. There is an advantage in that driving resolution is improved because the spacing is reduced by half.

Additionally, the number of TX trace channels can be reduced to 1/4 to 1/3 compared to the touch input device shown in FIG. 60, which has the advantage of reducing the thickness of the bezel (B).

FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating the touch input device shown in FIG. 59.

Referring to FIG. 65, the touch input device 500' may include a sensor unit 100A'' and a control unit 300 for controlling the sensor unit 100A''.

The sensor unit 100A'' includes a plurality of first to fourth patterns 101A', 102A', 103A, and 104A. Here, since the third and fourth patterns 103A and 104A are the same as the third and fourth patterns 103A and 104A shown in FIG. 60, their description will be omitted.

Hereinafter, the first and second patterns 101A' and 102A' will be described, but descriptions of parts that are the same as those of the first and second patterns 101A and 102A of FIG. 60 will be omitted for convenience.

The first pattern 101A' has a shape extending along the first direction. The first direction may be the long axis direction (L) of the screen of the touch input device. The first pattern 101A' includes a 1st a pattern 101a' and a 1b pattern 101b'. The first a pattern 101a' and the first b pattern 101b' are arranged along the first direction and spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance. The first pattern 101A' including the 1st a pattern 101a' and the 1b pattern 101b' may also be called ATX (Active TX).

The second pattern 102A' has a shape extending along the first direction, is disposed adjacent to the first pattern 101A', and is disposed at a predetermined distance from the first pattern 101A'. The second pattern 102A' includes a 2a pattern 102a' and a 2b pattern 102b'. The 2a pattern 102a' and the 2b pattern 102b' are arranged along the first direction and spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance. The second pattern 102A' including the 2a pattern 102a' and the 2b pattern 102b' may also be called Dummy TX (DTX).

In the plurality of first patterns 101A', one end of the plurality of first a patterns 101a' is electrically connected to the control unit 300, and the other ends are electrically open. Additionally, one end of the plurality of first b patterns 101b' is electrically connected to the control unit 300, and the other ends are electrically open. Here, one end is relatively close to the control unit 300, and the other end is relatively far from the control unit 300.

Each end of the plurality of first a patterns 101a' may be electrically connected to the control unit 300 and each other through a conductive pattern. Conductive patterns connecting the plurality of first a patterns 101a' and the control unit 300 may be arranged along the minor axis direction (S) inside the bezel (B) of the touch input device 500.

Each end of the plurality of first b patterns 101b' may be electrically connected to the control unit 300 through a conductive pattern. Conductive patterns connecting the plurality of first b patterns 101b' and the control unit 300 may be arranged along the minor axis direction S inside the bezel B of the touch input device 500.

In the plurality of second patterns 102A', one end of the plurality of second a patterns 102a' is connected to the control unit 300 and the second end after two adjacent ends are electrically connected to each other by the first conductive pattern. They are electrically connected through a conductive pattern, and other ends of the plurality of second a patterns 102a' are electrically connected to each other through a conductive pattern. Likewise, one end of the plurality of second b patterns 102b' is electrically connected to the control unit 300 through the second conductive pattern after two adjacent ends are electrically connected to each other by the first conductive pattern, and the plurality of ends are electrically connected to each other through the second conductive pattern. Other ends of the 2b patterns 102b' are electrically connected to each other through conductive patterns. Here, one end is relatively close to the control unit 300, and the other end is relatively far from the control unit 300.

The second conductive patterns connecting the plurality of second a and second b patterns 102a' and 102b' and the control unit 300 are located inside the bezel B of the touch input device 500' in the minor axis direction S. can be arranged. Here, the second conductive patterns connecting the plurality of second a and second b patterns 102a' and 102b' and the control unit 300 are connected to the plurality of first patterns 101A' and the control unit 300. It may be arranged inside the bezel B of the touch input device 500 along with conductive patterns (not shown).

When other ends of the plurality of second a patterns 102a' are electrically connected to each other, capacitances for each second a pattern 102a' are added, thereby reducing the total impedance. Accordingly, the same effect is achieved as if the other ends of the plurality of second a patterns 102a' are AC GND. Likewise, when other ends of the plurality of 2b patterns 102b' are electrically connected to each other, capacitances for each 2b pattern 102b' are added, thereby reducing the total impedance. Accordingly, the same effect is achieved as if the other ends of the plurality of second b patterns 102b' are AC GND.

The operation mode of the touch input device 500' shown in FIG. 65 will be described in detail.

In the touch driving/sensing mode, the control unit 300 electrically connects a plurality of driving circuit units 310 to a plurality of first patterns 101A' of the sensor unit 100A' to sense the touch position of an object such as a finger. You can do it. The control unit 300 may control a plurality of switches to electrically connect the conductive patterns connected to the plurality of first patterns 101A' with the plurality of driving circuit units 310.

Additionally, the control unit 300 may electrically connect a plurality of sensing circuit units 330 for sensing the touch position to a plurality of third patterns 103A of the sensor unit 100A'. The control unit 300 may control a plurality of switches to electrically connect the conductive patterns connected to the plurality of third patterns 103A with the plurality of sensing circuit units 330.

In this touch driving/sensing mode, the control unit 300 simultaneously or sequentially applies a driving signal (or touch driving signal) for touch sensing to a plurality of first patterns 101A' and a plurality of third patterns 101A'. A detection signal (or touch detection signal) received from 103A is received. A plurality of sensing circuits of the control unit 300 electrically connected to the plurality of third patterns 103A may output capacitance change amount information included in the input sensing signal as a predetermined voltage value. The control unit 300 may detect the touch position by processing the output voltage value.

In the antenna driving mode (or stylus driving mode, or stylus uplink mode), the control unit 300 connects a plurality of driving circuit units 310 for antenna driving to a plurality of second a patterns 102a' of the sensor unit 100A'. and can be electrically connected to the plurality of second b patterns 102b'. The control unit 300 may control a plurality of switches to electrically connect the conductive patterns connected to the plurality of second a patterns 102a' and the plurality of second b patterns 102b' with the plurality of driving circuit units 310. there is.

The control unit 300 may control the driving signal (or pen driving signal) output from each driving circuit unit 310 connected to the plurality of 2a patterns 102a' and the plurality of 2b patterns 102b'. . The control unit 300 generates opposing pulse signals from any two driving circuit units 310 electrically connected to the plurality of second a patterns 102a' and the plurality of second b patterns 102b'. You can control it to be output. Accordingly, the control unit 300 can change and set the size or location of the current loop in various ways.

In the stylus sensing mode (or stylus downlink mode), the control unit 300 connects a plurality of detection circuit units 330 for stylus sensing to a plurality of first patterns 101A' and a plurality of first patterns 101A' of the sensor unit 100A'. It can be electrically connected to the three patterns 103A'. The control unit 300 may control a plurality of switches to electrically connect the conductive patterns connected to the plurality of first patterns 101A' and the plurality of third patterns 103A with the plurality of sensing circuit units 330. .

The touch input device 500' shown in FIG. 65 has a structural difference in the plurality of first and second patterns 101A' and 102A' of the sensor unit 100A' compared to the touch input device shown in FIG. 60. There is a difference. That is, the plurality of first and second patterns 101A' and 102A' are obtained by dividing the first and second patterns 101A and 102A of FIG. 24 in half, so that the plurality of first and second patterns 101A' and 102A' of FIG. 24 ( 2 times more than 101A, 102A).

Due to these structural features, the touch input device 500' shown in FIG. 65 has a disadvantage in that the number of channels is increased compared to the touch input device 500 of FIG. 60, but the stylus pen is used in an antenna driving mode for driving the stylus pen. Since the pen driving signal can be applied only to the specific part where this pen is located, there is an advantage in reducing power consumption.

In addition, the touch input device shown in FIG. 65 has the disadvantage of slightly increasing the number of channels compared to the touch input device of FIG. 60, but each first pattern 101A' and second pattern 102A' are half the length. Since the resistance and capacitance values are lowered, the operating frequency bandwidth of the touch drive signal applied to the pattern used as the touch drive electrode of the sensor unit 100A' and the pen drive signal for driving the stylus pen can be expanded. There is.

FIG. 66 is a diagram schematically showing a modified example of the sensor units 100 and 100' shown in FIG. 52 or 55.

The sensor unit 100B shown in FIG. 66 can be used as a sensor unit of touch input devices according to various embodiments of the present invention described above. Therefore, hereinafter, the specific structure and shape of the sensor unit 100B will be described, and the method of driving the touch input device including the sensor unit 100B will be replaced with the above-described details.

Referring to FIG. 66, the sensor unit 100B includes a plurality of first to fourth patterns 101A, 102A, 103B, and 104B. A plurality of first to fourth patterns 101A, 102A, 103B, and 104B are arranged together on the same layer.

The first pattern 101A has a shape extending along the first direction (width direction). The first direction may be the long axis direction of the screen of the touch input device. The first pattern 101A may also be named ATX (Active TX). The first pattern 101A has a predetermined shape in which an electrical path is formed along the first direction (width direction).

The first pattern 101A may include a plurality of main pattern parts and a connection pattern part connecting two main pattern parts adjacent to each other among the plurality of main pattern parts. Here, the main pattern portion may have a diamond shape, but is not limited to this, and may have various shapes different from the connection pattern portion.

The first pattern 101A may have an opening inside which the second pattern 102A is disposed. The shape of the opening may correspond to the external shape of the first pattern 101A. The first pattern 101A may have a structure surrounding the second pattern 102A. The first pattern 101A is disposed at a predetermined distance from the second pattern 102A.

The second pattern 102A has a shape extending along the first direction, is disposed adjacent to the first pattern 101A, and is disposed at a predetermined distance from the first pattern 101A. The second pattern 102A may also be called Dummy TX (DTX). The second pattern 102A is adjacent to the first pattern 101A and has a predetermined shape such that an electrical path is formed along a first direction (width direction).

The second pattern 102A is disposed inside the first pattern 101A.

The second pattern 102A may include a plurality of main pattern parts and a connection pattern part connecting two main pattern parts adjacent to each other among the plurality of main pattern parts. Here, the main pattern portion may have a diamond shape, but is not limited to this, and may have various shapes different from the connection pattern portion.

The main pattern portion of the second pattern 102A may have a shape corresponding to the main pattern portion of the first pattern 101A, and the connection pattern portion of the second pattern 102A may correspond to the connection pattern portion of the first pattern 101A. It may be a shape that becomes

The other ends (second side ends) of the plurality of second patterns 102A are electrically connected to each other by the second conductive pattern D2.

The third patterns 103B are arranged one above and one below each connection pattern portion of the first pattern 101A. The third pattern 103B may have a diamond shape, but is not limited to this, and may have various shapes different from the connection pattern portion. The third pattern 103B may have an opening inside which the fourth pattern 104B is disposed. The shape of the opening may correspond to the external shape of the third pattern 103B. The third pattern 103B may have a structure surrounding the fourth pattern 104B. The third pattern 103B is disposed at a predetermined distance from the fourth pattern 104B. The third pattern 103B may be referred to as Active RX (ARX), and the fourth pattern 104B may be referred to as Dummy RX (DRX).

Among the plurality of third patterns 103B, third patterns arranged along a second direction perpendicular to the first direction are electrically connected by the third conductive pattern D3. Accordingly, the third patterns arranged along the second direction are electrically connected by a plurality of third conductive patterns D3, so that the electrical connection direction (electrical path) of the third pattern 103 shown in FIG. 52 or 55 is electrically connected. ) can be the same as

The third conductive pattern D3 is arranged to cross the connection pattern portion of the first pattern 101A disposed between two adjacent third patterns. The third conductive pattern D3 may also be called a conductive bridge. Both ends of the third conductive pattern D3 are connected to vias connected to the third pattern 103B.

Among the plurality of fourth patterns 104B, fourth patterns arranged along a second direction perpendicular to the first direction are electrically connected by the fourth conductive pattern D4. Accordingly, the fourth patterns arranged along the second direction are electrically connected by a plurality of fourth conductive patterns D4, so that the electrical connection direction (electrical path) of the fourth pattern 104 shown in FIG. 52 or 55 is electrically connected. ) can be the same as

The fourth conductive pattern D4 is arranged to cross the connection pattern portion of the first pattern 101A disposed between two adjacent fourth patterns. Additionally, the fourth conductive pattern D4 is located furthest from the control unit among the plurality of fourth patterns 104B and electrically connects the fourth patterns 104B arranged along the first direction. The fourth conductive pattern D4 may also be called a conductive bridge. Both ends of the fourth conductive pattern D4 are connected to vias connected to the fourth pattern 104B.

A plurality of first to fourth patterns (101A, 102A, 103B, 104B) are disposed together on the first layer of the same layer, and the second to fourth conductive patterns (D2, D3, D4) are disposed together on the second layer of the same layer. can be placed together. Here, the first layer and the second layer are physically and electrically spaced apart from each other.

Figure 67 is a modified example of the sensor unit shown in Figure 66.

Referring to FIG. 67, in the sensor unit, the 1-1 pattern parts located at the first side or/and the second side end of the plurality of 1-1 pattern parts are open in the first direction (or horizontal direction). It has the shape of Accordingly, among the plurality of 1-2 pattern parts, the 1-2 pattern parts located at the ends of the first side and/or the second side may be exposed to the outside.

Among the plurality of 1-2 pattern parts, the 1-2 pattern parts located at the second end are electrically connected to each other through a connection pattern without a via. Here, the connection pattern may be a conductive trace. Compared to FIG. 37, there is an advantage that the 1-2 pattern parts located at the second end of the plurality of 1-2 pattern parts are not connected through vias and are disposed on the same layer as the connection pattern.

Additionally, in the sensor unit, the 2-1 pattern parts located at the first side or/and the second side end of the plurality of 2-1 pattern parts have a shape that is open in the second direction (or vertical direction). . Accordingly, the 2-2 pattern parts located at the ends of the first side and/or the second side among the plurality of 2-2 pattern parts may be exposed to the outside.

The 2-2 pattern parts located at the second end of the plurality of 2-2 pattern parts are electrically connected to each other through a connection pattern without a via. Here, the connection pattern may be a conductive trace. Compared to FIG. 37, there is an advantage that the 2-2 pattern parts located at the second end of the plurality of 2-2 pattern parts are not connected through vias and are disposed on the same layer as the connection pattern.

The sensor unit shown in FIG. 67 can also be controlled by the control unit 300 and driven in any one of a touch sensing mode, an antenna driving mode, and a stylus sensing mode. Specifically, in the touch sensing mode, the control unit 300 can control the touch driving signal to be applied to ATX1, ATX2, and ATX3 and detect the touch position by receiving touch reception signals from ARX1, ARX2, and ARX3. In the antenna driving mode, the control unit 500 may apply a pen driving signal to DTX1, DTX2, and DTX3, or may apply a pen driving signal to DRX1, DRX2, and DRX3. In the stylus sensing mode, the control unit 500 can detect the position of the stylus pen by receiving pen reception signals from ATX1, ATX2, ATX3, and ARX1, ARX2, and ARX3. Additionally, various combinations of <Table 2> can be applied to the sensor unit 200' of FIG. 67. Accordingly, the sensor unit of FIG. 67 may be driven by the control unit 300 in any one of a touch sensing mode, an antenna driving mode, and a stylus sensing mode in various ways.

Figure 68 is a diagram showing another modified example of the sensor unit.

Referring to FIG. 68, the structure of the main pattern portion of the first to fourth patterns 101', 102', 103', and 104' is different from that of FIG. 60.

68 shows that the outline of the second pattern 102' or the fourth pattern 104' is formed in a concave-convex structure, and the opening of the first pattern 101' or the fourth pattern 104' is formed in the second pattern 102. ') or has a shape corresponding to the outer structure of the fourth pattern 104'.

This structure can improve the mutual capacitance (Cm) value between the first pattern 101' and the second pattern 102' in the same layer, and the third pattern 103' and the second pattern 102' in the same layer. There is an advantage in that the mutual capacitance (Cm) value between the four patterns 104' can be improved. As the mutual capacitance (Cm) is improved, the voltage value output from the sensing circuit unit of the control unit 300 can be increased in the stylus sensing mode. Therefore, stylus sensing sensitivity can be improved.

Here, the modified example shown in FIG. 68 can also be applied to the sensor units according to the various embodiments described above.

Figure 69 is another modified example of the sensor unit.

Compared to the sensor unit 100A shown in FIG. 60, the sensor unit 100'' shown in FIG. 69 further includes a plurality of fifth patterns 105 and a plurality of sixth patterns 106.

The plurality of fifth patterns 105 are disposed on the same layer (2nd layer) as the plurality of first patterns 101 and are arranged in numbers along the first and second directions.

Each fifth pattern 105 includes a shape that corresponds to and overlaps a portion of the main pattern portion of the third pattern 103 disposed on another layer (1st layer). Additionally, the fifth pattern 105 is electrically connected to the fourth pattern 104 disposed on another layer (1st layer) through a via.

The plurality of fifth patterns 105 may form a mutual capacitance (Cm) in a vertical direction with the plurality of third patterns 103. In addition, the fifth pattern 105 is electrically connected to the fourth pattern 104 inside the third pattern 103, so the third pattern 103 is not only connected to the fourth pattern 104 but also to the fifth pattern 105. ) can also form a mutual capacitance (Cm).

The plurality of sixth patterns 106 are disposed on the same layer (1st layer) as the plurality of third patterns 103 and are arranged in numbers along the first and second directions.

Each sixth pattern 106 includes a shape that corresponds to and overlaps a portion of the main pattern portion of the first pattern 101 disposed on another layer (2nd layer). Additionally, the sixth pattern 106 is electrically connected to the second pattern 102 disposed on another layer (2nd layer) through a via.

The plurality of sixth patterns 106 may form a mutual capacitance (Cm) in a direction perpendicular to the plurality of first patterns 101 . In addition, the sixth pattern 106 is electrically connected to the second pattern 102 inside the first pattern 101, so the first pattern 101 is not only the second pattern 102 but also the sixth pattern 105. ) can also form a mutual capacitance (Cm).

In this way, the sensor unit 100'' shown in FIG. 69 can form mutual capacitance not only in the horizontal direction of the first pattern 101 but also in the vertical direction, and in the horizontal direction as well as the third pattern 103. There is an advantage in that mutual capacitance in the vertical direction can be formed. Accordingly, the voltage value output from the sensing circuit unit of the control unit 500 can be increased in the stylus sensing mode, and the stylus sensing sensitivity can be improved.

Here, the modified example shown in FIG. 69 can also be applied to the sensor units according to the various embodiments described above.

Figure 70 is another modified example of the sensor unit.

Compared to the sensor unit 100A shown in FIG. 60, the sensor unit 100''' shown in FIG. 70 has a part of the second pattern 102' disposed on a different layer from the remaining part. Specifically, the second pattern 102' includes a plurality of main pattern parts and a connection pattern part connecting two main pattern parts adjacent to each other among the plurality of main pattern parts. The plurality of main pattern parts of the second pattern 102' The main pattern portion is disposed on a different layer from the plurality of connection pattern portions of the second pattern 102'.

The plurality of main pattern parts of the second pattern 102' are disposed on the same layer as the third pattern 103 and the fourth pattern 104, and the plurality of connection pattern parts of the second pattern 102' are similar to those in FIG. 60. It is disposed on the same layer as the first pattern 101.

Like the sensor unit 100A shown in FIG. 60, the sensor unit 100''' shown in FIG. 70 may be driven by the control unit 300 in a touch sensing mode, an antenna driving mode, and a stylus pen sensing mode. . Additionally, various combinations of <Table 2> can be applied to the sensor unit 100''' of FIG. 70. Accordingly, the sensor unit 100''' of FIG. 70 may be driven by the control unit 300 in any one of a touch sensing mode, an antenna driving mode, and a stylus sensing mode in various ways.

Figure 71 is another modified example of the sensor unit.

Compared to the sensor unit 100''' shown in FIG. 70, the sensor unit 100'''' shown in FIG. 71 has a part of the fourth pattern 104' on a different layer from the remaining part. It is placed. Specifically, the fourth pattern 104' includes a plurality of main pattern parts and a connection pattern part connecting two main pattern parts adjacent to each other among the plurality of main pattern parts. The plurality of main pattern parts of the fourth pattern 104' The main pattern portion is disposed on a different layer from the plurality of connection pattern portions of the fourth pattern 104'. The plurality of main pattern parts of the fourth pattern 104' are disposed on the same layer as the first pattern 101, and the plurality of connection pattern parts of the fourth pattern 104' are the plurality of connection pattern parts of the second pattern 102'. It is disposed on the same layer as the main pattern portion and the third pattern 103.

In summary, in the sensor unit 100'''' shown in FIG. 71, a plurality of connection pattern parts of the first pattern 101 and the second pattern 102', and a plurality of connection pattern parts of the fourth pattern 104' The main pattern portion is disposed on the first layer, the third pattern 103, the plurality of connection pattern portions of the fourth pattern 104', and the plurality of main pattern portions of the second pattern 102' are disposed on the second layer. . Here, the first floor and the second floor are different floors, and the positional relationship is such that one can be placed above the other.

Like the sensor unit 100A shown in FIG. 60, the sensor unit 100'''' shown in FIG. 71 can be driven by the control unit 300 in a touch sensing mode, an antenna driving mode, and a stylus pen sensing mode. there is. Additionally, various combinations of <Table 2> can be applied to the sensor unit 100'''' of FIG. 71. Accordingly, the sensor unit 100'''' of FIG. 71 can be driven by the control unit 300 in any one of a touch sensing mode, an antenna driving mode, and a stylus sensing mode in various ways.

Figure 72 is another modified example of the sensor unit.

The sensor unit 100''''' shown in FIG. 72 is a modified version of the sensor unit 100''''' shown in FIG. 71. Compared to the sensor unit 100'''' shown in FIG. 71, the sensor unit 100''''' shown in FIG. 72 has a second pattern 102'' and a fourth pattern 104''. ) is different.

Specifically, the second pattern 102'' includes a plurality of main pattern parts 102a'' and a plurality of connection pattern parts 102b', and the size of the main pattern part 102a'' is shown in FIG. 71. It has a larger shape than the main pattern portion of the second pattern 102' of the illustrated sensor portion 100''''. The main pattern portion 102a'' may have a size and shape corresponding to that of the main pattern portion of the first pattern 101.

In addition, the fourth pattern 104'' includes a plurality of main pattern parts 104a'' and a plurality of connection pattern parts 104b', and the size of the main pattern part 104a'' is shown in FIG. 71. It has a larger shape than the main pattern portion of the fourth pattern 104' of the sensor portion 100''''. The main pattern portion 104a'' may have a size and shape corresponding to that of the main pattern portion of the third pattern 103.

Since the main pattern portion 102a'' of the second pattern 102'' has a larger size than the main pattern portion of the second pattern 102' of FIG. 71, it corresponds to the first pattern 101. As the area is expanded, the mutual capacitance (Cm) between the second pattern 102'' and the first pattern 101 can be further improved. Therefore, stylus sensing sensitivity can be further improved in the stylus sensing mode.

In addition, because the main pattern portion 104a'' of the fourth pattern 104'' has a larger size than the main pattern portion of the fourth pattern 104' of FIG. 71, the third pattern 103 and As the corresponding area is expanded, the mutual capacitance (Cm) between the fourth pattern 104'' and the third pattern 104 can be further improved. Therefore, stylus sensing sensitivity can be further improved in the stylus sensing mode.

Figure 73 is a diagram showing another modified example of the sensor unit.

Compared to the sensor unit 100A shown in FIG. 60, the sensor unit 100'''''' shown in FIG. 73 has a plurality of other ends (second side ends) of the second pattern 102 and a plurality of The other ends (second ends) of the fourth pattern 104 are electrically connected to each other.

In this configuration, when the sensor unit 100' is driven in the stylus sensing mode, not only other fourth patterns but also a plurality of second patterns 102 are electrically connected to one fourth pattern 104, so the impedance is There is an advantage to being lower.

Like the sensor unit 100A shown in FIG. 60, the sensor unit 100'''''' shown in FIG. 73 is driven by the control unit 300 in touch sensing mode, antenna driving mode, and stylus pen sensing mode. It can be. Additionally, various combinations of <Table 2> can be applied to the sensor unit 100'''''' of FIG. 71. Accordingly, the sensor unit 100'''' of FIG. 73 may be driven by the control unit 300 in any one of a touch sensing mode, an antenna driving mode, and a stylus sensing mode in various ways.

Figure 74 is another modified example of the sensor unit.

The sensor unit 100''''''' shown in FIG. 74 has a different second pattern 102' and a fourth pattern 104' compared to the sensor unit 100A shown in FIG. 60, It further includes a plurality of fifth patterns 105' and a plurality of sixth patterns 106', and further includes a capacitor (cap) electrically connected to the fifth pattern 105' and the sixth pattern 106'. do. Since the remaining configurations are the same, the other parts will be described in detail below.

The second pattern 102' may be a bar pattern disposed inside the first pattern 101 and extending in the second direction. Here, the second pattern 102' may have a constant width. The second pattern 102' is disposed on the same layer (2nd layer) as the first pattern 101.

The fourth pattern 104' may be a bar pattern disposed inside the third pattern 103 and extending in the first direction. Here, the fourth pattern 104' may have a constant width. The fourth pattern 104' is disposed on the same layer (1st layer) as the third pattern 103.

The plurality of fifth patterns 105' are disposed on the same layer (2nd layer) as the plurality of first patterns 101, and are arranged in numbers along the first and second directions. The plurality of fifth patterns 105' may be arranged in multiple numbers between the plurality of first patterns 101.

Each fifth pattern 105' includes a shape that corresponds to and overlaps the main pattern portion of the third pattern 103 disposed on another layer (1st layer). Additionally, the fifth pattern 105' is electrically connected to the fourth pattern 104' disposed on another layer (1st layer) through a via.

The fifth patterns 105' electrically connected to one fourth pattern 104' among the plurality of fifth patterns 105' are arranged along the second direction. Here, a predetermined capacitor (cap) is connected to the fifth pattern 105' disposed at the other edge among the fifth patterns 105' arranged along the second direction. And, the capacitor (cap) can be grounded. Here, among the fifth patterns 105' arranged along the second direction, the fifth pattern 105' disposed at the other edge refers to the pattern electrically connected furthest from the control unit 300 shown in FIG. 60. do. Although not shown in a separate drawing, the capacitor (cap) may be connected between the fifth pattern 105' and the ELVSS of the display panel (not shown). In addition, the capacitor (cap) has one end connected to the fifth pattern 105', and the other end has the third pattern 103, fourth pattern 104', and sixth pattern 106' disposed. It can be connected to another layer (1st layer).

The plurality of fifth patterns 105' may form a mutual capacitance (Cm) in a vertical direction with the plurality of third patterns 103. In addition, the fifth pattern 105' is electrically connected to the fourth pattern 104' inside the third pattern 103, so the third pattern 103 is not only the fourth pattern 104' but also the fifth pattern 104'. It is possible to form a mutual capacitance (Cm) with the pattern 105'.

The plurality of sixth patterns 106' are disposed on the same layer (1st layer) as the plurality of third patterns 103, and are arranged in numbers along the first and second directions. The plurality of sixth patterns 106' may be arranged in multiple numbers between the plurality of third patterns 103.

Each sixth pattern 106' includes a shape that corresponds to and overlaps the main pattern portion of the first pattern 101 disposed on another layer (2nd layer). Additionally, the sixth pattern 106' is electrically connected to the second pattern 102' disposed on another layer (2nd layer) through a via.

Sixth patterns 106' electrically connected to one second pattern 102' among the plurality of sixth patterns 106' are arranged along the first direction. Here, a predetermined capacitor (cap) is connected to the sixth pattern 106' disposed at the other edge among the sixth patterns 106' arranged along the first direction. And, the capacitor (cap) can be grounded. Here, among the sixth patterns 106' arranged along the first direction, the sixth pattern 106' disposed at the other edge refers to the pattern electrically connected furthest from the control unit 300 shown in FIG. 24. do. Although not shown in a separate drawing, the capacitor (cap) may be connected between the sixth pattern 106' and the ELVSS of the display panel (not shown). In addition, the capacitor (cap) has one end connected to the sixth pattern 106', and the other end is disposed with the first pattern 101, the second pattern 102', and the fifth pattern 105'. It can be connected to another layer (2nd layer).

The plurality of sixth patterns 106' may form a mutual capacitance (Cm) in a vertical direction with the plurality of first patterns 101. In addition, the sixth pattern 106' is electrically connected to the second pattern 102' inside the first pattern 101, so the first pattern 101 is not only the second pattern 102' but also the sixth pattern 102'. It is possible to form a mutual capacitance (Cm) with the pattern 106'.

In this way, the sensor unit 100''''''' shown in FIG. 74 can form mutual capacitance not only in the horizontal direction of the first pattern 101 but also in the vertical direction, and the third pattern 103 There is an advantage in that mutual capacitance can be formed not only in the horizontal direction but also in the vertical direction. Accordingly, the voltage value output from the sensing circuit unit of the control unit 300 can be increased in the stylus sensing mode, and the stylus sensing sensitivity can be improved.

In addition, the second pattern 102' and the fourth pattern 104', unlike the second pattern 102 and the fourth pattern 104 of the sensor unit 100A of FIG. 60, have a diamond-shaped main pattern part. Therefore, when the display panel is located below the sensor unit 100''''''', there is an advantage in that visibility can be further improved compared to the sensor unit 100A of FIG. 60.

Like the sensor unit 100A shown in FIG. 60, the sensor unit 100''''''' shown in FIG. 74 is switched to a touch sensing mode, an antenna driving mode, and a stylus pen sensing mode by the control unit 300. It can be driven. Additionally, various combinations of <Table 2> can be applied to the sensor unit 100''''''' of FIG. 74. Accordingly, the sensor unit 100''''''' of FIG. 74 may be driven by the control unit 300 in any one of a touch sensing mode, an antenna driving mode, and a stylus sensing mode in various ways.

Meanwhile, although not shown in a separate drawing, a capacitor (cap) is electrically connected to the other end of the second and fourth patterns 102 and 104, respectively, without the fifth and sixth patterns 105' and 106'. can be connected Furthermore, in the sensor units according to the various embodiments described above, other ends of the plurality of second and fourth patterns may not be connected to each other, but a capacitor may be connected to each other end.

Figure 75 is another modified example of the sensor unit.

In the case of the sensor unit 100A of FIG. 60, when the stylus pen 10 is located on the right edge (or left edge) of the sensor unit 100A, it is difficult to provide a sufficient magnetic field signal with the stylus pen 10, so the stylus pen 10 There may be a problem in which the signal emitted from the pen 10 is not sufficiently large. In order to solve this problem, the sensor unit 100'''''''' shown in FIG. 39 includes a first trace t1 and a second trace in addition to the sensor unit 100A shown in FIG. 60. It further includes (t2).

The first trace (t1) and the second trace (t2) are directly connected to the conductive trace (to) that electrically connects the other ends of the plurality of second patterns 102, and are connected to the active area (tp, or It is placed in an inactive area outside the touch area. Here, at least a portion of the conductive trace (to) may also be disposed outside the active area (tp). The active area (tp) refers to an area where an object, for example, a finger or the stylus pen 50, can be directly touched, and an inactive area is arranged around the active area (tp). The inactive area may be, for example, a bezel area.

Specifically, the first trace (t1) is disposed in a non-active area outside the active area (tp), one end is directly connected to the conductive trace (to), and the other end is connected to a touch driving mode, a touch sensing mode, an antenna driving mode, In any one of the stylus sensing modes, the driving circuit unit of the control unit 300 may be connected to the switch sw.

The second trace (t2) is disposed in the inactive area outside the active area (tp), one end is directly connected to the conductive trace (to), and the other end is connected to the driving circuit part of the control unit 500 and the switch (sw) in the antenna driving mode. ) can be connected through.

The first trace (t1) may be placed in the inactive area while surrounding one of the left and right sides of the active area (tp), and the second trace (t2) may be placed in the inactive area while surrounding the other side of the active area (tp). can be placed in

The first trace (t1) and the second trace (t2) are in the active area (tp) of the stylus pen 10 when the sensor unit 100''''''''' is driven in the antenna driving mode as shown in FIG. 61. ) Even if it is located at one edge of the stylus pen 10, a sufficient magnetic field signal can be provided. Therefore, in the touch input device including the sensor unit 100'''''''' shown in FIG. 75, the stylus pen 10 has a sufficient magnetic field even if the stylus pen 10 is located anywhere in the active area (tp). By receiving a signal, sufficient signal can be emitted.

Each of the first and second traces (t1, t2) of the sensor unit 100'''''''' shown in FIG. 75 is responsible for one channel in FIG. 61, and the driving method as in FIG. 61 This can be applied as is.

Like the sensor unit 100A shown in FIG. 60, the sensor unit 100'''''''' shown in FIG. 75 is configured to operate in a touch sensing mode, an antenna driving mode, and a stylus pen sensing mode by the control unit 300. It can be driven with . Additionally, various combinations of <Table 2> can be applied to the sensor unit 100'''''''' of FIG. 75. Accordingly, the sensor unit 100''''''''' of FIG. 75 may be driven by the control unit 300 in any one of a touch sensing mode, an antenna driving mode, and a stylus sensing mode in various ways.

FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining a first modified example of the fifth pattern 105 shown in FIG. 69.

Referring to FIG. 76, the fifth pattern 105' is disposed on a different layer from the layer on which the third pattern 103 and fourth pattern 104 are disposed.

The fifth pattern 105' may have a shape corresponding to the third pattern 103. For example, the fifth pattern 105' has a diamond shape and may have a diamond-shaped opening therein.

One part of the fifth pattern 105' may be arranged to overlap the third pattern 103 in the vertical direction, and the other part may be arranged to overlap the fourth pattern 104 in the vertical direction. For example, the outer edge portion of the fifth pattern 105' may overlap with the inner edge portion of the third pattern 103 disposed on another layer. The inner edge portion of the fifth pattern 105' may overlap the outer edge portion of the fourth pattern 104 disposed on another layer.

The fifth pattern 105' is electrically connected to the fourth pattern 104 disposed on another layer through a conductive via (v). Here, the number of vias (v) may be multiple and may be arranged at the outer edge of the fourth pattern 104.

This fifth pattern 105' may form a mutual capacitance (Cm) in a vertical direction with the third pattern 103 disposed on another layer. In addition, the fifth pattern 105' is electrically connected to the fourth pattern 104 inside the third pattern 103 through a via (v), so the third pattern 103 is ultimately connected to the fourth pattern 104 inside the third pattern 103. It is possible to form a mutual capacitance (Cc_tx) not only with the fourth pattern 104 but also with the fifth pattern 105' disposed on another layer.

Although not shown in a separate drawing, the sixth pattern 106 shown in FIG. 33 may have the same shape as the fifth pattern 105' shown in FIG. 76. At this time, the outer edge portion of the sixth pattern (not shown) may overlap with the inner edge portion of the first pattern 101 disposed on another layer, and the inner edge portion of the sixth pattern (not shown) may overlap with the inner edge portion of the first pattern 101 disposed on another layer. It may overlap with the outer edge portion of the second pattern 102 disposed. Additionally, the sixth pattern (not shown) may be electrically connected to the second pattern 102 disposed on another layer through a conductive via. Likewise, this sixth pattern (not shown) can also form a mutual capacitance in a direction perpendicular to the first pattern 101, and the sixth pattern (not shown) is connected to the second pattern 102 and the inside of the first pattern 101. Because they are electrically connected, the first pattern 101 can eventually form a mutual capacitance (Cm) not only with the second pattern 102 but also with the sixth pattern (not shown).

As such, the sensor unit including a modified example of the fifth pattern 105' shown in FIG. 76 can form mutual capacitance in the vertical direction as well as the horizontal direction of the third pattern 103, and the sixth pattern 103 can form a mutual capacitance in the vertical direction. The sensor unit including a modified example (not shown) also has the advantage of forming mutual capacitance not only in the horizontal direction of the first pattern 101 but also in the vertical direction. Therefore, in the stylus sensing mode, the voltage value output from the sensing circuit part of the control unit can be increased, thereby improving the stylus sensing sensitivity.

Figure 77 is a modified example of Figure 76.

Figure 76 shows the fifth pattern 105' disposed below the third and fourth patterns 103 and 104, and Figure 77 shows, on the contrary, the fifth pattern 105' is arranged below the third and fourth patterns (103, 104). 103, 104).

The structure of the fifth pattern 105' shown in FIGS. 76 and 77 can be applied to the sensor unit according to the various embodiments described above.

FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the fifth pattern 105' shown in FIG. 76.

Referring to FIG. 78, the fifth pattern 105'' has the same shape and location as the fifth pattern 105' shown in FIG. 76. The difference between the fifth pattern 105'' and the fifth pattern 105' shown in FIG. 76 is that the fifth pattern 105'' has a conductive via and the third pattern 103 disposed on a different layer. It is electrically connected through (v). And, a via (v) is disposed at the inner edge of the third pattern 103.

Since this fifth pattern 105'' is electrically connected to the third pattern 103 disposed on another layer, the fourth pattern 104 has a mutual capacitance ( Cc_Tx) can be formed.

The sensor unit including a modified example of the fifth pattern 105'' shown in FIG. 78 also has the advantage of being able to form mutual capacitance not only in the horizontal direction but also in the vertical direction.

Figure 79 is a modified example of Figure 78.

In FIG. 78, the fifth pattern 105'' is shown disposed below the third and fourth patterns 103 and 104, and in FIG. 79, on the contrary, the fifth pattern 105'' is shown below the third and fourth patterns 103 and 104. It is shown arranged on patterns 103 and 104.

The structure of the fifth pattern 105' shown in FIGS. 78 and 79 can be applied to the sensor unit according to the various embodiments described above.

FIGS. 80 and 81 are diagrams for explaining modified examples of the third pattern 103 and the fourth pattern 104 in the sensor unit as shown in FIG. 70 or 71.

Referring to FIGS. 80 and 81, the third pattern 103 and the fourth pattern 104 according to the modified example are disposed on different layers, and a portion of the third pattern 103 and the fourth pattern 104 A portion of is arranged to overlap in the vertical direction (or vertical direction). For example, the inner edge of the third pattern 103 may be arranged to vertically overlap the outer edge of the fourth pattern 104. Figure 80 shows the third pattern 103 arranged on the fourth pattern 104, and Figure 81 shows the third pattern 103 arranged below the fourth pattern 104.

The sensor unit including the third and fourth patterns 103 and 104 shown in FIGS. 80 and 81 may form mutual capacitance (Cc_Tx) in the vertical direction rather than the horizontal direction. Although not shown in separate drawings, the first and second patterns 101 and 102 shown in FIGS. 70 and 71 may also have the same structure as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81.

The structure according to the modified example shown in FIGS. 80 and 81 can be applied to the sensor unit according to the various embodiments described above.

Figure 82 is a diagram schematically showing a part of a touch input device according to another embodiment.

The touch unit (or touch device) 260 included in the touch input device according to another embodiment includes a touch panel 261 and a touch controller 262 that controls the touch panel 261. The touch controller 262 may include a first driving/receiving unit 2620 and a second driving/receiving unit 2622 that transmit and receive signals to and from the touch panel 261, and a control unit 2624.

The touch panel 261 includes a plurality of first touch electrodes 111-1 to 111-m for detecting touch coordinates in a first direction and a plurality of first touch electrodes 111-1 to 111-m for detecting touch coordinates in a second direction intersecting the first direction. It may include second touch electrodes 121-1 to 121-n. For example, the plurality of first touch electrodes 111-1 to 111-m may have a shape extending in the second direction, and the plurality of second touch electrodes 121-1 to 121-n may have a shape extending in the first direction. It may have a shape extending in one direction. Within the touch panel 261, a plurality of first touch electrodes 111-1 to 111-m may be arranged along a first direction, and a plurality of second touch electrodes 121-1 to 121-n may be arranged in a first direction. It may be arranged along the second direction.

The first driving/receiving unit 2620 may apply a driving signal to the plurality of first touch electrodes 111-1 to 111-m. The second driving/receiving unit 2622 may receive detection signals from the plurality of second touch electrodes 121-1 to 121-n.

Although it has been described above that the touch panel 261 is implemented by a mutual capacitance method, the touch panel 261 may be implemented by a self-capacitance method, and the touch electrodes 111-1 to 111-m in the mutual capacitance method, 121-1 to 121-n), the first driving/receiving unit 2620, and the second driving/receiving unit 2622 are appropriately modified, new components are added, or some components are omitted to suit the self-capacitance method. Modification will be easy for those skilled in the art.

That is, the touch panel 261 may include a plurality of self-capacitance type touch electrodes (or touch patterns). In this case, the touch electrodes (or touch patterns) may be arranged in a dot shape. As described above, it can also be arranged in a form extending in one direction.

Next, the electrode (or pattern) and trace will be described with reference to FIG. 83.

Figure 83 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of electrodes (or patterns) and traces of a touch unit according to an embodiment.

The sensor unit of the touch unit may include an antenna to which touch electrodes 111 and 121 and a dummy electrode are connected. For example, a plurality of dummy electrodes 121D may be located on the same layer as the touch electrodes 111 and 121, and some of the plurality of dummy electrodes 121D may be connected to each other by a bridge 121B. Bridge 121B may be connected to pads 113a and 113b through traces 112.

The touch controller 262 may apply a driving signal to the antenna 121A to resonate the stylus pen 10. The driving signal may include a signal (for example, a sine wave, a square wave, etc.) having a frequency corresponding to the resonance frequency of the resonance circuit unit 12, and may be an alternating voltage or alternating current having a predetermined frequency. The frequency and size of these driving signals can be changed according to the control of the control unit 2624. Specifically, the touch controller 262 may apply a driving signal to one of the two adjacent bridges 121B and ground the other one.

The touch electrodes 111 and 121 are connected to the pads 113a and 113b through traces 112, 122a, and 122b in the peripheral area located at the edge of the touch area. The first touch electrodes 111-1, 111-2, 111-3, ... are connected to the respective traces 112, and the second touch electrodes 121-1, 121-2 , 121-3, ...) are connected corresponding to the respective traces 122a and 122b.

The touch electrodes 111 and 121 and the traces 112, 122a and 122b may be formed of the same layer. The touch electrodes 111 and 121 and the traces 112, 122a and 122b may be formed of a conductive material exhibiting high transmittance and low impedance, such as metal mesh or silver nanowire. However, the touch electrodes 111 and 121 and the traces 112, 122a and 122b may be located in different layers and may be made of ITO or graphene, but are not limited thereto.

The pads 113a and 113b are connected to the touch controller 262 and transmit a signal (e.g., a driving signal) of the touch controller 262 to the touch electrodes 111 and 121. A signal (eg, detection signal) from 121) is transmitted to the touch controller 262.

Figure 84 is a diagram showing another example of the arrangement of electrodes (or patterns) and traces of the touch unit according to an embodiment.

83 , the touch electrodes 111 and 121 are connected to the pads 113a and 113b through traces 112, 122a, and 122b in the peripheral area located at the edge of the touch area.

One touch electrode has two signal input terminals, and the two signal input terminals are connected to two traces. For example, the second touch electrode 121-9 is a “U” shaped electrode and has a first signal input terminal (TE1) located on the upper side and a second signal input terminal (TE2) located on the lower side.

One of the two signal input terminals may be connected to ground through a switch or may be connected to the driving/receiving unit 2620. For example, the first signal input terminal (TE1) is connected to the driving/receiving unit 2620, and the second signal input terminal (TE2) is connected to the switch (SW). The switch SW connects the second signal input terminal TE2 to ground or the driving/receiving unit 2620.

The touch controller 262 may connect one signal input terminal to ground and apply a driving signal to resonate the stylus pen 10. The touch controller 262 can simultaneously receive detection signals from two signal input terminals. Additionally, when driving for a general finger touch, the touch controller 262 may apply driving signals of the same phase to the two signal input terminals.

Although it has been described above that one signal input terminal is connected to ground and a driving signal is applied, the touch controller 262 may also apply driving signals of opposite phases to the two signal input terminals.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85 , when the stylus pen 10a or 10b is located on the touch screen 20, the signals induced in the touch electrodes 111 and 121 and the traces 112, 122a and 122b will be described. .

Figure 85 is a diagram showing a case where a stylus pen is located on the sensor unit of the touch unit according to an embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 85, the inductor portion 14 of the stylus pens 10a and 10b is between the first touch electrodes 111-5 and 111-6 and the second touch electrodes on the touch screen 20. It is located between (121-8, 121-9).

The stylus pens 10a and 10b resonate by a driving signal applied to the antenna 121A or the touch electrodes 111 and 121 having two signal input terminals. A current (Ir) flows in the coil of the inductor portion 14 due to resonance. This current (Ir) causes eddy current in the touch electrodes 111 and 121 and the traces 112, 122a and 122b. These eddy currents are formed in a direction opposite to the direction of the current (Ir).

Therefore, currents Ia1 and Ia2 are formed in the -Y axis direction in the first touch electrodes 111-4 and 111-5 located on the left side (-X axis direction) of the inductor unit 14, and the inductor unit ( Currents Ia3 and Ia4 are formed in the +Y-axis direction in the first touch electrodes 111-6 and 111-7 located on the right side (+X-axis direction) of 14). That is, the direction of the current induced in the first touch electrodes 111-1 to 111-5 and the direction of the current induced in the first touch electrodes 111-6 to 111-10 are opposite to each other.

Currents Ib1 and Ib2 are formed in the -X-axis direction in the second touch electrodes 121-7 and 121-8 located on the upper side (+Y-axis direction) of the inductor portion 14, and Currents Ib3 and Ib4 are formed in the +X-axis direction in the second touch electrodes 121-9 and 121-10 located on the lower side (-Y-axis direction). That is, the direction of the current induced in the second touch electrodes 121-1 to 121-8 and the direction of the current induced in the second touch electrodes 121-9 to 121-16 are opposite to each other.

Currents (Ic1, Ic2) are formed in the -Y-axis direction in the traces 122a located on the left side of the inductor section 14, and currents (Ic1, Ic2) are formed in the +Y-axis direction in the traces 122b located on the right side of the inductor section 14. Currents (Ic3, Ic4) are formed. That is, the direction of the current induced in the traces 122a and the direction of the current induced in the traces 122b are opposite to each other.

In addition, the direction of the current induced in the second touch electrodes 121-1 to 121-8 and the direction of the current induced in the traces 122a connected to the second touch electrodes 121-1 to 121-8 is the same. The direction of the current induced in the second touch electrodes 121-9 to 121-16 and the direction of the current induced in the traces 122b connected to the second touch electrodes 121-9 to 121-16 are different from each other. It's the opposite.

Looking at the direction of the current at one point in time with respect to the pads 113a and 113b, current may flow into the pad 113a from the second touch electrodes 121-1 to 121-8. From the pad 113b to the second touch electrodes 121-9 to 121-16 according to the size of the current induced in the second touch electrodes 121-9 to 121-16 and the traces 122b connected thereto. Current may be drawn out, or current may be drawn into the pad 113b from the second touch electrodes 121-9 to 121-16. However, in Figure 85, since the inductor portion 14 of the stylus pen 10 is located closer to the second touch electrodes 121-9 to 121-16 than the traces 122b, the second touch electrodes ( Current may flow into the pad 113b from 121-9 to 121-16).

Separately, in the case of the stylus pen 10b of FIG. 1 (b), the electric field signal E is output to the touch electrodes 111 and 121, so that the first touch electrodes 111-5 and 111-6 ) and a detection signal by the electric field signal (E) applied to the second touch electrodes 121-8 and 121-9 is received.

In relation to this, a method of measuring signals of the touch unit 260 will be described with reference to FIG. 86 .

FIG. 86 is a graph showing a method of measuring a signal of a touch unit according to the embodiments shown in FIGS. 84 and 85.

Figure 86 shows the voltage change (V8) of the second touch electrode 121-8 and the voltage change (V9) of the second touch electrode 121-9 in which currents in opposite directions are induced.

The first driving/receiving unit 2620 and the second driving/receiving unit 2622 sample the voltage change in response to the frequency of the driving signal in order to measure the detection signal according to the voltage change. At least one sampling point (I, Q, IB, QB) may be any timing that can be set periodically in relation to the frequency of the driving signal. For example, the period between I and I is equal to a half period of the driving signal.

The detection signal includes the difference (ΔI) between the voltage value measured at time I and the voltage value measured at time IB and/or the difference (ΔQ) between the voltage value measured at time Q and the voltage value measured at time QB.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88, the detection signal by the stylus pen 10b of FIG. 1(b) will be described.

Figures 87 and 88 are graphs showing detection signals by a stylus pen according to one embodiment.

Figure 87 is a graph of detection signals received from the first touch electrodes 111-1 to 111-10.

As shown in FIG. 87, the current direction between the first touch electrodes 111-1 to 111-5 and the first touch electrodes 111-6 to 111-10 is induced in the opposite direction, and thus the measured The detection signal AB1 has opposite signs in the first touch electrode 111-5 and 111-6. In addition, the closer to the inductor unit 14, the larger the current will be induced, so the magnitude of the current induced in the first touch electrode 111-5 and the first touch electrode 111-6 is different from that of the other first touch electrodes. It is larger than the magnitude of the current induced in (111-1 to 111-4, 111-7 to 111-10).

The stylus pen 10b outputs the electric field signal E to the first touch electrode 111-5 and the first touch electrode 111-6 through the conductive tip 11b, so that the detection signal AE1 is generated. is received.

The detection signal AC1 received by the first driving/receiving unit 2620 has a form in which the detection signal AB1 and the detection signal AE1 are combined. In this case, the control unit 2624 can determine the touch point between the two first touch electrodes 111-5 and 111-6 where the difference in size of the detection signal AC1 is maximum, and the exact touch point can be determined by using interpolation, etc. can be calculated.

Figure 88 is a graph of detection signals received from the second touch electrodes 121-1 to 121-16.

As shown in FIG. 88, the current direction between the second touch electrodes 121-1 to 121-8 and the second touch electrodes 121-9 to 121-16 is induced in the opposite direction, and thus the measured The detection signal AB2 has opposite signs in the second touch electrode 121-8 and 121-9. In addition, the closer the inductor unit 14 is, the larger the current will be induced, so the magnitude of the current induced in the second touch electrode 121-8 and the second touch electrode 121-9 is different from that of the other second touch electrodes. It is larger than the magnitude of the current induced in (121-1 to 121-7, 121-10 to 121-16).

The stylus pen 10b outputs the electric field signal E to the second touch electrode 121-8 and the second touch electrode 121-9 through the conductive tip 11b, thereby generating the detection signal AE2. is received.

The detection signal AC2 received by the second driving/receiving unit 2622 has a form in which the detection signal AB2 and the detection signal AE2 are combined. In this case, the control unit 2624 may determine the touch point between the two second touch electrodes 121-8 and 121-9 where the difference in size of the detection signal AC2 is maximum, and the exact touch point may be determined by using interpolation, etc. can be calculated.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90 , the detection signal by the stylus pen 10a in (a) of FIG. 1 will be described.

Figures 89 and 90 are graphs showing detection signals by a stylus pen according to another embodiment.

Figure 89 is a graph of detection signals received from the first touch electrodes 111-1 to 111-10.

As shown in FIG. 89, the current direction between the first touch electrodes 111-1 to 111-5 and the first touch electrodes 111-6 to 111-10 is induced in the opposite direction, so that the first driving/ The detection signal AB3 received by the receiver 2620 has opposite signs at the first touch electrode 111-5 and the first touch electrode 111-6. In addition, the closer to the inductor unit 14, the larger the current will be induced, so the magnitude of the current induced in the first touch electrode 111-5 and the first touch electrode 111-6 is different from that of the other first touch electrodes. It is larger than the magnitude of the current induced in (111-1 to 111-4, 111-7 to 111-10).

In this case, the control unit 2624 may determine the touch point between the two first touch electrodes 111-5 and 111-6, where the signs of the detection signal AB3 are opposite and each signal size is large, and the exact touch point is It can be calculated using interpolation, etc. In this case, the control unit 2624 can differentiate the detection signal AB3 and determine the area with the maximum value as the touch point. Alternatively, the control unit 2624 receives a differential signal from two adjacent first touch electrodes of each of the first touch electrodes 111-1 to 111-10, and based on the maximum or minimum value in the received differential signal, You can determine the touch point of the stylus pen. For example, an area with a maximum or minimum value in the received differential signal can be determined as a touch point. Here, the two adjacent first touch electrodes may be two adjacent first touch electrodes 111-1 and 111-2, or 111-2 and 111-3. Alternatively, the two adjacent first touch electrodes are two first touch electrodes (111-1 and 111-3, or 111-2 and 111-4) that are not adjacent to each other, and the two first touch electrodes (111-1 and 111-3, or 111-2 and 111-4) are not adjacent to each other. At least one other first touch electrode 111-2 or 111-3 may be disposed between 111-1 and 111-3, or 111-2 and 111-4).

Figure 90 is a graph of detection signals received from the second touch electrodes 121-1 to 121-16.

As shown in FIG. 90, the current direction between the second touch electrodes 121-1 to 121-8 and the second touch electrodes 121-9 to 121-16 is induced in the opposite direction, so that the second driving/ The detection signal AB4 received by the receiver 2622 has opposite signs in the second touch electrode 121-8 and the second touch electrode 121-9. In addition, the closer the inductor unit 14 is, the larger the current will be induced, so the magnitude of the current induced in the second touch electrode 121-8 and the second touch electrode 121-9 is different from that of the other second touch electrodes. It is larger than the magnitude of the current induced in (121-1 to 121-7, 121-10 to 121-16).

In this case, the control unit 2624 can determine the touch point between the two second touch electrodes 121-8 and 121-9, where the signs of the detection signal AB4 are opposite and each signal size is large, and the exact touch point is It can be calculated using interpolation, etc. In this case, the control unit 2624 can determine the area with the maximum value as the touch point by differentiating the detection signal AB4. Alternatively, the control unit 2624 receives a differential signal from two adjacent second touch electrodes among the second touch electrodes 121-1 to 121-8, and moves the stylus based on the maximum or minimum value of the received differential signal. You can determine the pen's touch point. For example, an area with a maximum or minimum value in the received differential signal can be determined as a touch point. Here, the two adjacent second touch electrodes may be two adjacent second touch electrodes 121-1 and 121-2, or 121-2 and 121-3. Alternatively, the two adjacent second touch electrodes are two second touch electrodes (121-1 and 121-3, or 121-2 and 121-4) that are not adjacent to each other, and the two second touch electrodes (121-1 and 121-3, or 121-2 and 121-4) are not adjacent to each other. At least one other second touch electrode 121-2 or 121-3 may be disposed between 121-1 and 121-3, or 121-2 and 121-4).

Next, with reference to FIG. 91 , when the stylus pen 10a or 10b is located on the touch screen 20, the signals induced in the touch electrodes 111 and 121 and the traces 112, 122a and 122b will be described. .

Figure 91 is a diagram showing a case where a stylus pen is located on a sensor unit of a touch unit according to an embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 91, the inductor portion 14 of the stylus pens 10a and 10b is between the first touch electrodes 111-2 and 111-3 and the second touch electrodes on the touch screen 20. It is located between (121-2, 121-3).

The stylus pens 10a and 10b resonate by a driving signal applied to the antenna 121A or the touch electrodes 111 and 121 having two signal input terminals. A current (Ir) flows in the coil of the inductor portion 14 due to resonance. This current (Ir) causes eddy current in the touch electrodes 111 and 121 and the traces 112, 122a and 122b. These eddy currents are formed in a direction opposite to the direction of the current (Ir).

Therefore, currents Ia1 and Ia2 are formed in the -Y axis direction in the first touch electrodes 111-1 and 111-2 located on the left side (-X axis direction) of the inductor unit 14, and the inductor unit ( Currents Ia3 and Ia4 are formed in the +Y-axis direction in the first touch electrodes 111-3 and 111-4 located on the right side (+X-axis direction) of 14). That is, the direction of the current induced in the first touch electrodes 111-1 and 111-2 and the direction of the current induced in the first touch electrodes 111-3 to 111-10 are opposite to each other.

Currents Ib1 and Ib2 are formed in the -X-axis direction in the second touch electrodes 121-1 and 121-2 located on the upper side (+Y-axis direction) of the inductor unit 14, and Currents (Ib3, Ib4, Ib5, Ib6) are formed in the +X axis direction in the second touch electrodes 121-3, 121-4, 121-9, and 121-10 located on the lower side (-Y axis direction). do. That is, the direction of the current induced in the second touch electrodes 121-1 and 121-2 and the direction of the current induced in the second touch electrodes 121-3 to 121-16 are opposite to each other.

Currents (Ic1 to Ic4) are formed in the -Y-axis direction in the traces 122a located on the left side of the inductor portion 14, and currents (Ic1 to Ic4) are formed in the traces 122b located on the right side of the inductor portion 14 in the +Y-axis direction. Currents (Ic5, Ic6) are formed. That is, the direction of the current induced in the traces 122a and the direction of the current induced in the traces 122b are opposite to each other.

In addition, the direction of the current induced in the second touch electrodes 121-1 and 121-2 and the direction of the current induced in the traces 122a connected to the second touch electrodes 121-1 and 121-2 is the same. The direction of the current induced in the second touch electrodes 121-3 to 121-8 and the direction of the current induced in the traces 122a connected to the second touch electrodes 121-3 to 121-8 are different from each other. It's the opposite. The direction of the current induced in the second touch electrodes 121-9 to 121-16 and the direction of the current induced in the traces 122b connected to the second touch electrodes 121-9 to 121-16 are different from each other. It's the opposite.

Looking at the direction of the current at one point in time with respect to the pads 113a and 113b, current may flow into the pad 113a from the second touch electrodes 121-1 and 121-2. The second touch electrodes 121-3 to 121 are connected to the pads 113a and 113b according to the magnitude of the current induced in the second touch electrodes 121-3 to 121-16 and the traces 122a and 122b connected thereto. -16), or current may be drawn into the pads 113a and 113b from the second touch electrodes 121-3 to 121-16.

Separately, in the case of the stylus pen 10b of FIG. 1 (b), the electric field signal E is output to the touch electrodes 111 and 121, so that the first touch electrodes 111-2 and 111-3 ) and a detection signal by the electric field signal (E) applied to the second touch electrodes 121-2 and 121-3 is received.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93, the detection signal by the stylus pen 10b of FIG. 1(b) will be described.

Figures 92 and 93 are graphs showing detection signals by a stylus pen according to one embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 92, the current direction between the first touch electrodes 111-1 and 111-2 and the first touch electrodes 111-3 to 111-10 is induced in the opposite direction, and thus the measured The detection signal AB5 has opposite signs in the first touch electrode 111-2 and the first touch electrode 111-3. In addition, the closer to the inductor unit 14, the larger the current will be induced, so the magnitude of the current induced in the first touch electrode 111-2 and the first touch electrode 111-3 is different from that of the other first touch electrodes. It is larger than the magnitude of the current induced in (111-1, 111-4 to 111-10).

The stylus pen 10b outputs the electric field signal E to the first touch electrode 111-2 and the first touch electrode 111-3 through the conductive tip 11b, so that the detection signal AE5 is generated. is received.

The detection signal AC5 received by the first driving/receiving unit 2620 has a form in which the detection signal AB5 and the detection signal AE5 are combined. In this case, the control unit 2624 may determine the touch point between the two first touch electrodes 111-2 and 111-3 where the difference in size of the detection signal AC5 is maximum, and the exact touch point may be determined by using interpolation, etc. can be calculated.

Figure 93 is a graph of detection signals received from the second touch electrodes 121-1 to 121-16.

As shown in FIG. 93, the current direction between the second touch electrodes 121-1 and 121-2 and the second touch electrodes 121-3 to 121-16 is induced in the opposite direction, and thus the measured The detection signal AB6 has opposite signs in the second touch electrode 121-2 and 121-3. In addition, the closer the inductor unit 14 is, the larger the current will be induced, so the magnitude of the current induced in the second touch electrode 121-2 and the second touch electrode 121-3 is different from that of the other second touch electrodes. It is larger than the magnitude of the current induced in (121-1, 121-4 to 121-16).

The stylus pen 10b outputs the electric field signal E to the second touch electrode 121-2 and the second touch electrode 121-3 through the conductive tip 11b, thereby generating the detection signal AE6. is received.

The detection signal AC6 received by the second driving/receiving unit 2622 has a form in which the detection signal AB6 and the detection signal AE6 are combined. In this case, the control unit 2624 may determine the touch point between the two second touch electrodes 121-2 and 121-3 where the difference in size of the detection signal AC6 is maximum, and the exact touch point may be determined by using interpolation or the like. can be calculated.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95 , the detection signal by the stylus pen 10a in (a) of FIG. 1 will be described.

Figures 94 and 95 are graphs showing detection signals by a stylus pen according to another embodiment.

Figure 94 is a graph of detection signals received from the first touch electrodes 111-1 to 111-10.

As shown in FIG. 94, the current direction between the first touch electrodes 111-1 and 111-2 and the first touch electrodes 111-3 to 111-10 is induced in the opposite direction, so that the first driving/ The detection signal AB7 received by the receiver 2620 has opposite signs at the first touch electrode 111-2 and the first touch electrode 111-3. In addition, the closer to the inductor unit 14, the larger the current will be induced, so the magnitude of the current induced in the first touch electrode 111-2 and the first touch electrode 111-3 is different from that of the other first touch electrodes. It is larger than the magnitude of the current induced in (111-1, 111-4 to 111-10).

In this case, the control unit 2624 can determine the touch point between the two first touch electrodes 111-2 and 111-3, where the signs of the detection signal AB7 are opposite and each signal size is large, and the exact touch point is It can be calculated using interpolation, etc.

Figure 95 is a graph of detection signals received from the second touch electrodes 121-1 to 121-16.

As shown in FIG. 95, the current direction between the second touch electrodes 121-1 and 121-2 and the second touch electrodes 121-3 to 121-16 is induced in the opposite direction, so that the second driving/ The detection signal AB8 received by the receiver 2622 has opposite signs in the second touch electrode 121-2 and the second touch electrode 121-3. In addition, the closer the inductor unit 14 is, the larger the current will be induced, so the magnitude of the current induced in the second touch electrode 121-2 and the second touch electrode 121-3 is different from that of the other second touch electrodes. It is larger than the magnitude of the current induced in (121-1, 121-4 to 121-16).

In this case, the control unit 2624 may determine the touch point between the two second touch electrodes 121-2 and 121-3, where the signs of the detection signal AB8 are opposite and each signal size is large, and the exact touch point is It can be calculated using interpolation, etc.

Meanwhile, the signal measurement method of the touch unit shown in FIGS. 85 to 95 can be applied to the sensor unit and control unit shown in FIGS. 52 to 81. Specifically, any one of the first to fourth patterns 101, 102, 103, and 104 shown in FIG. 52 is the first touch electrode 111-1 to 111-10 shown in FIG. 85 or the second touch electrode 111-1 to 111-10 shown in FIG. 85. It may correspond to the touch electrodes 121-1 to 121-16. For example, either the first pattern 101 or the second pattern 102 shown in FIG. 52 corresponds to the first touch electrodes 111-1 to 111-10 shown in FIG. 85, and Either of the third pattern 103 and the fourth pattern 104 shown in may correspond to the second touch electrodes 121-1 to 121-16 shown in FIG. 85.

As an example, the first pattern 101 shown in Figure 58 corresponds to the first touch electrodes 111-1 to 111-10 shown in Figure 85, and the third pattern 103 shown in Figure 58 corresponds to the first touch electrodes 111-1 to 111-10 shown in Figure 85. When corresponding to the second touch electrodes 121-1 to 121-16 shown in FIG. 85, the plurality of first patterns 101 of the sensor unit 100 of FIG. 52 are patterns for pen detection in the horizontal axis direction. , the plurality of third patterns 103 may be patterns for pen detection in the vertical axis direction. In this case, the control unit that controls the sensor unit 100 receives stylus pen detection signals from the plurality of first patterns 101. The control unit selects a touch point on the horizontal axis of the stylus pen between two pen detection patterns that output two pen detection signals having the maximum and minimum values among the stylus pen detection signals received from the plurality of first patterns 101. You can decide. In addition, the control unit selects the stylus between two pen detection patterns that output two pen detection signals with opposite signs and the largest signal sizes among the stylus pen detection signals received from the plurality of third patterns 103. It can be determined by the touch point on the vertical axis of the pen.

Alternatively, the control unit may determine a horizontal axis touch point of the stylus pen between patterns in which signals of two adjacent patterns have opposite signs among the stylus pen detection signals received from the plurality of first patterns 101 . Additionally, the control unit may determine a vertical axis touch point of the stylus pen between patterns in which signals of two adjacent patterns have opposite signs among the stylus pen detection signals received from the plurality of third patterns 103.

Alternatively, the control unit may differentiate the stylus pen detection signals received from the plurality of first patterns 101 and determine a position on the pen detection patterns where the differential value is maximized as the horizontal axis touch point of the stylus pen. In addition, the control unit may differentiate the stylus pen detection signals received from the plurality of third patterns 103 and determine the position on the pen detection patterns where the differential value is maximum as the vertical axis touch point of the stylus pen.

Alternatively, the control unit may receive a differential signal from two adjacent first patterns among the plurality of first patterns 101 and determine the touch point of the stylus pen based on the maximum or minimum value of the received differential signal. For example, the position on the pen sensing patterns having the maximum or minimum value in the received differential signal can be determined as the horizontal axis touch point. Here, the two adjacent first patterns may be two adjacent first patterns. Alternatively, the two adjacent first patterns may be two first patterns that are not adjacent to each other, and at least one other first pattern may be disposed between the two first patterns.

Additionally, the control unit may receive a differential signal from two adjacent third patterns among the plurality of third patterns 103 and determine the touch point of the stylus pen based on the maximum or minimum value of the received differential signal. For example, the position on the pen sensing patterns having the maximum or minimum value in the received differential signal can be determined as the vertical touch point. Here, the two adjacent third patterns may be two adjacent third patterns. Alternatively, the two adjacent third patterns may be two non-adjacent third patterns, and at least one other third pattern may be disposed between the two third patterns.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the touch input device 2 having the touch screen 20c in (c) of FIG. 2A will be described.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the touch input device 2 having the touch screen 20c in (c) of FIG. 47A will be described.

Figure 96 is a block diagram schematically showing a touch input device.

Compared to the touch input device of FIG. 82, the touch input device of FIG. 96 further includes a loop coil 264 and a coil driver 263 that applies a driving signal to the loop coil 264.

Loop coil 264 may be placed near the touch screen 20 or may be placed anywhere within the touch input device 2. The loop coil 264 may also be configured as an antenna of the short-range communication module 212, such as RFID or NFC. The driving signal includes alternating voltage or alternating current with a predetermined frequency.

Figure 97 is a diagram schematically showing a part of a touch unit according to an embodiment.

Compared to the touch unit of FIG. 82, the touch unit of FIG. 97 further includes a loop coil 264 and a coil driver 263 that drives the loop coil 264.

The coil driver 263 applies a driving signal to the loop coil 264. The driving signal may include a signal (for example, a sine wave, a square wave, etc.) having a frequency corresponding to the resonance frequency of the resonance circuit unit 12, and may be an alternating voltage or alternating current having a predetermined frequency. The frequency and size of these driving signals can be changed according to the control of the control unit 2624.

The stylus pens 10a and 10b resonate by the driving signal applied to the loop coil 264. A current (Ir) flows in the coil of the inductor portion 14 due to resonance.

Figure 98 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of electrodes (or patterns) and traces of a touch unit according to another embodiment.

The touch electrodes 111 and 121 in the sensor unit of the touch unit are connected to the pads 113a and 113b through traces 112, 122a and 122b in the peripheral area located at the edge of the touch area. The first touch electrodes 111-1, 111-2, 111-3, ... are connected to the respective traces 112, and the second touch electrodes 121-1, 121-2 , 121-3, ...) are connected corresponding to the respective traces 122a and 122b.

The touch electrodes 111 and 121 and the traces 112, 122a and 122b may be formed of the same layer. The touch electrodes 111 and 121 and the traces 112, 122a and 122b may be formed of a conductive material exhibiting high transmittance and low impedance, such as metal mesh or silver nanowire. However, the touch electrodes 111 and 121 and the traces 112, 122a and 122b may be located in different layers and may be made of ITO or graphene, but are not limited thereto.

The pads 113a and 113b are connected to the touch controller 262 and transmit a signal (e.g., a driving signal) of the touch controller 262 to the touch electrodes 111 and 121. A signal (eg, detection signal) from 121) is transmitted to the touch controller 262.

Figure 99 is a schematic diagram illustrating a method of driving a stylus pen in the touch input device 2 or the stylus driving device according to the present invention, and Figure 100 is a schematic diagram illustrating a method of driving a stylus pen in the touch input device 2 or the stylus driving device according to the present invention. This diagram specifically explains how to activate the stylus pen.

As shown in FIG. 99, the touch input device 2 according to the present invention generates a magnetic field using the touch panel 261, and the magnetic field operates the resonance circuit 12 of the stylus 2. The resonance circuit 12 of the stylus 2 includes a capacitor and an inductor, and a current is generated in the resonance circuit 12 of the stylus 2 by electromagnetic induction by the electromagnetic field generated by the touch panel 261.

Figure 100 (a) shows a method of generating a magnetic field by controlling the direction of current flowing through a plurality of first electrodes extending along the Y-axis, and (b) shows a method of generating a magnetic field through a plurality of second electrodes extending along the X-axis. It shows a method of generating an electromagnetic field by controlling the direction of current.

In another embodiment, a magnetic field may be generated by simultaneously controlling the direction of current flowing through the first electrode and the second electrode. As shown in the coordinates, in FIG. 100, the horizontal direction of the drawing indicates the Y axis, and the vertical direction of the drawing indicates the X axis.

The direction of current flowing through the plurality of first electrodes can be individually controlled. At this time, the direction of the current flowing through the electrodes arranged on the left and right sides of the tip position (P) of the stylus 2 is controlled in the reverse direction. Based on the position of the first electrode around the tip of the stylus 2, the direction of current flowing through each of the plurality of first electrodes of the touch panel 261 is controlled. Since the plurality of first electrodes adjacent to each other and arranged in parallel do not form a closed loop, individual current control must be performed for each of the plurality of first electrodes.

When an electromagnetic field is generated in a way that does not configure a closed loop as in the embodiment of the present invention, since the conventional touch sensor is used as is, various types of electronic devices such as foldable or rollable ( The same function can be achieved by immediately applying it to smartphones, TVs, etc. In addition, since the product can be produced using conventional production equipment and methods, economic efficiency in manufacturing can be promoted. From another perspective, the use of a stylus can be made possible through firmware upgrades for existing products that only detected touch by a finger. This has the effect of expanding the functionality of the product.

Referring again to (b) of FIG. 100, the direction of the current flowing through the first electrode disposed on the left side and the first electrode disposed on the right side based on an imaginary line passing through the tip of the stylus 2 and parallel to the Y axis. are driven to oppose each other. Although it is possible to control the current direction of both electrodes by determining the position of the tip of the stylus 2 in advance, the entire surface of the touch panel 261 is divided into a plurality of regions, and the current direction of the electrodes included in each of the plurality of regions is controlled. By controlling the direction, the stylus 2 can respond to the electromagnetic field no matter where it is located on the touch panel 261. An example is a method of controlling the current directions of the electrodes placed on the left edge and the right edge of the divided area in the reverse direction, but the method is not limited to this, and various applications and modifications can be considered.

As shown in (b) of FIG. 100, the direction of current flowing through the plurality of second electrodes can also be individually controlled. At this time, the direction of the current flowing through the electrodes disposed on the upper and lower sides is controlled in the reverse direction, centered on the position P of the tip of the stylus 2. In other words, the direction of the current flowing through the second electrode is adjusted based on the position of the second electrode around the tip of the stylus 2.

Since the plurality of second electrodes adjacent to each other and arranged in parallel do not form a closed loop, individual current control must be performed for each of the plurality of second electrodes.

In more detail, the current flowing through the second electrode disposed on the upper side and the second electrode disposed on the lower side is driven in opposite directions based on an imaginary line passing through the tip of the stylus 2 and parallel to the X-axis. . At this time, in relation to controlling the current direction of each electrode, current direction control may be performed on all first electrodes and/or all second electrodes included in the touch panel 261, but the position of the tip of the stylus 2 is If known in advance, it is also possible to control only the electrodes within a certain distance from the stylus tip.

Here too, by dividing the entire surface of the touch pad 261 into a plurality of regions and controlling the current direction of the electrodes included in each of the plurality of regions, the stylus 2 is exposed to a magnetic field no matter where it is located on the touch panel 261. You can enable it to react. An example would be a method of controlling the current directions of the electrodes placed on the upper edge and the lower edge of the divided area in the reverse direction.

An electromagnetic field is formed because a reverse current flows left and right and/or up and down around the tip of the stylus 2, and this induces a current in the resonance circuit 12 of the stylus 2, thereby causing the stylus 2 to generate an electromagnetic field signal. is created. The current generated in the resonance circuit 12 of the stylus 2 forms an electromagnetic field centered on the inductor coil, thereby generating a current signal centered on the tip of the stylus 2. This current signal has the characteristic of rotating clockwise or counterclockwise around the tip of the stylus (2).

The touch input device 2 according to an embodiment of the present invention uses at least one electrode (or pattern) of the touch panel 261 to receive the current signal generated from the stylus 2. The coordinates where the tip is located can be determined. Below, a method for determining touch coordinates by receiving a signal generated by the stylus 2 activated by the touch panel 261 will be described in detail.

Signal detection from stylus pen

A touch input device according to an embodiment of the present invention detects a signal from a stylus pen using the touch panel 261.

Figure 101 is a schematic diagram for explaining a method of detecting a stylus 2 signal in the touch input device 2 according to the present invention, and Figures 102 to 104 are schematic diagrams for the touch input device 2 according to an embodiment of the present invention. This is a diagram to specifically explain a method of detecting a signal from a stylus pen.

When a current is induced in the resonance circuit 12 of the stylus 2 by the magnetic field generated by individually controlling the direction of current flowing through the electrodes included in the touch panel 261 (the current value reaches its maximum value at the resonance frequency) , an electromagnetic field is induced around the inductor coil by the current generated in the resonance circuit 12 of the stylus 2, as shown in (a) of Figure 101, and the electromagnetic field is again directed to the stylus 2 as shown in (b) of Figure 101. Generates a current signal such as Below, a method for obtaining touch coordinates by receiving a magnetic field signal from the stylus 2 will be described.

Figure 102 shows the current signal generated by the magnetic field generated by the stylus 2. The electromagnetic field generated by the current induced in the resonance circuit 12 of the stylus 2 generates a current signal that rotates counterclockwise, as shown in FIG. 102, around the tip of the stylus 2. In another embodiment, a clockwise rotating current signal may be generated. A current signal rotating clockwise or counterclockwise may be, but is not limited to, an eddy current.

The current signal rotating counterclockwise causes current flow as shown in (a) of FIG. 102 with respect to the first electrodes 121Y-1 to 121Y-m of the touch panel 261. That is, the current signal rotating counterclockwise based on the position (P) of the tip of the stylus 2 passes through the tip of the stylus 2 and is placed on the left side based on an imaginary line parallel to the Y axis. A current flow in opposite directions is created for the first electrode and the first electrode disposed on the right side. A current signal rotating clockwise will generate an opposite current signal for the first electrode of the touch panel 261.

Likewise, a current signal rotating counterclockwise causes current flow as shown in (b) of FIG. 102 with respect to the second electrodes 121X-1 to 121X-n of the touch panel 261. That is, the current signal rotating counterclockwise based on the position (P) of the tip of the stylus (2) passes through the tip of the stylus (2) and is disposed on the upper side based on an imaginary line parallel to the Current flows in opposite directions are created for the two electrodes and the second electrode disposed on the lower side. A current signal rotating clockwise will generate an opposite current signal for the second electrode of the touch panel 261.

In part A of Figure 102 (b), a current signal rotating counterclockwise by the stylus creates a predetermined current flow to the second electrodes, as described above. However, since a predetermined current flow is formed in the wiring (trace) connected to each second electrode by a current signal rotating counterclockwise, the current flow in some of the second electrodes included in part A and the partial second electrodes As the current flow of the connected wires goes in opposite directions, the size of the current output from the wires may be relatively reduced. On the other hand, in part B of Figure 102 (b), the current flow of some other second electrodes included in part B and the current flow of the wiring connected to the other part of the second electrode are in the same direction, so that the other part of the second electrode The magnitude of the current output from the wiring connected to the electrode may be relatively larger than the magnitude of the current output from the wiring included in portion A. This is because wiring is connected to one side of some of the second electrodes and to the other side of other second electrodes.

Figure 103 is a diagram explaining the current signal detected at the first electrode extending in the Y-axis direction when receiving a signal from the stylus. Due to the current signal generated by the stylus 2 (here, rotating clockwise around the tip), the direction of the current flowing through the first electrode varies depending on the positional relationship with the tip of the stylus 2.

Specifically, when a current rotating clockwise is generated by the current signal generated by the stylus 2, as shown in (a) of FIG. 103, the first The direction of current flowing in the electrode varies in response to the direction of movement (direction of rotation) of the current signal generated by the stylus 2. The current flowing through the first electrode disposed on the left side with respect to the virtual line (CLy) passing through the tip of the stylus 2 and parallel to the Y axis is opposite to the direction of the current flowing through the first electrode disposed on the right side. .

The signal received from each of the n first electrodes has a sudden change in current at the position of the tip of the stylus 2, as shown in the bottom graph of Figure 103(b). After differentiating this, the coordinates corresponding to the peak value are found. You can check the X coordinate value of the touch location by the stylus (2). Here, a differential signal may be received from two adjacent first electrodes among the n first electrodes, and the touch point of the stylus pen may be determined based on the maximum or minimum value of the received differential signal. For example, the X coordinate value of the touch position by the stylus pen 2 can be confirmed as the coordinate corresponding to the maximum or minimum value in the received differential signal. Here, the two adjacent first electrodes may be two adjacent first electrodes. Alternatively, the two adjacent first electrodes may be two first electrodes that are not adjacent to each other, and at least one other first electrode may be disposed between the two first electrodes.

Here, the direction of the current flowing through the first electrode of the touch panel 261 corresponds to the rotation (movement) direction of the current signal. For example, if the current signal rotates clockwise around the tip of the stylus, This means that among the first electrodes, current flows upward to the electrode located to the left of the tip of the stylus, and current flows downward to the electrode located to the right, which means that the directions of the current correspond. Conversely, if the current signal rotates counterclockwise around the tip of the stylus, the current flows downward to the electrode located to the left of the tip of the stylus among the first electrodes, and the current flows upward to the electrode located to the right, and so on. The direction of the current will correspond.

If we explain that the current moves in a clockwise circular motion around the tip of the stylus, the current flows upward to the electrode located to the left of the tip of the stylus among the first electrodes in response to the tangential vector at a point of 180 degrees in the circular motion trajectory. It can be explained that the current flows downward to the electrode located on the right, corresponding to the tangent vector at the 0 degree point.

Figure 104 is a diagram explaining the current signal detected at the second electrode extending in the X-axis direction when receiving a signal from the stylus. Due to the current signal generated by the stylus 2, the direction of the current flowing through the first electrode varies depending on the positional relationship with the tip of the stylus 2.

That is, the current flowing in the second electrode disposed above and below the tip of the stylus 2 has a direction corresponding to the rotation direction of the current signal induced by the electromagnetic field of the stylus. Specifically, the current flowing through the second electrode disposed on the upper side and the second electrode disposed on the lower side based on the virtual line (CLx) passing through the tip of the stylus 2 and parallel to the X-axis is the rotation of the current signal. They take opposite directions in response to each other.

When the signals detected from each of the m second electrodes are analyzed, a sudden change in current occurs at the position of the tip of the stylus 2. After differentiating the detected current value, the coordinates corresponding to the peak value are found and judged as the Y coordinate value of the touch position by the stylus (2). Here, a differential signal may be received from two adjacent second electrodes among the m second electrodes, and the touch position of the stylus pen 2 may be determined based on the maximum or minimum value of the received differential signal. For example, the Y coordinate value of the touch position by the stylus pen 2 can be confirmed as the coordinate corresponding to the maximum or minimum value in the received differential signal. Here, the two adjacent second electrodes may be two adjacent second electrodes. Alternatively, the two adjacent second electrodes may be two non-adjacent second electrodes, and at least one other second electrode may be disposed between the two second electrodes.

That the direction of the current flowing through each of the plurality of second electrodes of the touch panel 261 corresponds to the rotation (movement) direction of the current signal caused by the stylus 2 means that, for example, the current signal moves the tip of the stylus. If it rotates clockwise to the center, this means that the direction of the current corresponds, with the current flowing to the right in the electrode located above the tip of the stylus among the second electrodes, and the current flowing to the left in the electrode located below. Of course, if the direction of rotation changes, the direction of the current flowing from each electrode will also be reversed.

Assuming that the current moves in a clockwise circular motion around the tip of the stylus, the current flows to the right in the electrode located above the tip of the stylus among the second electrodes in response to the tangent vector at the 90 degree point in the circular motion trajectory. It can be explained that the current flows to the left in the electrode located on the lower side in response to the tangent vector at the point of 270 degrees.

An embodiment of the present invention can activate the stylus 2 and detect the electromagnetic field signal of the stylus using electrodes (or patterns) of a touch panel that do not constitute a closed loop. That is, the n first electrodes aligned in parallel and the m second electrodes now aligned orthogonal and parallel each individually receive the electromagnetic field signal of the stylus, making it possible to detect the touch position of the stylus more precisely. .

Figure 105 shows various wiring structures of second electrodes in a touch input device according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 104 shows wiring (or traces) of a plurality of second electrodes extending parallel to the The wiring is connected to the bottom, and the second electrode disposed at the bottom is shown assuming a structure in which the wiring is connected to the right.

The wiring of the electrode can be changed in various ways, and the wiring may be connected only to the left side of the touch panel 261, as shown in (b) of FIG. 105, or it is also possible to connect the wiring only to the right side. In this case, the graph shape of the received signal may vary, but in any case, the signal pattern changes rapidly around the point where the tip of the stylus 2 is located, and the touch coordinates can be determined based on this.

Figures 106 and 107 show the experimental process and results for verifying the signal detection ability of a stylus using a touch input device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

This experiment was conducted using an EMR pen whose resonance frequency was adjusted to 400 kHz. As shown in (a) of Figure 106, the EMR pen was placed at the first position (P1) and the second position (P2) of the touch surface of the touch input device 2, and then a signal was detected, and a signal was detected on the touch input device 2. It was confirmed that the EMR pen was activated and emitting a signal. This means that a current is induced in the resonance circuit of the EMR pen by the electromagnetic field generated by the touch panel 261. When the EMR pen was in the first position (P1), the signal received through the first electrode of the touch pad 261 was analyzed to obtain a graph as shown in (b) of Figure 106, and the point where the signal changed suddenly was analyzed to obtain As a result of comparing the X coordinate of the identified EMR pen and the X coordinate of the first position (P1) of the EMR pen, they matched.

The signal received by the touch panel 261 from the EMR pen at the second position (P2) appeared as shown in (c) of FIG. 106. As a result of comparing the X-coordinate of the EMR pen identified at the point where the signal changes rapidly and the

The graphs in (b) and (c) of Figure 106 are for IQ sampling signals, where each line represents the ΔI signal and ΔQ signal, the vertical axis represents the size of the signal value, and the horizontal axis represents the first electrode (18). It means numbers numbered in order of arrangement.

Figure 107 shows a signal received through the second electrode of the touch pad 261 in the same experiment. As shown in (a) of Figure 107, the EMR pen was placed at the first position (P1) and the second position (P2) of the touch surface of the touch input device 2, and then a signal was detected. A signal generated by the EMR pen was received through the second electrode of the touch pad 261. This means that a current is induced in the resonance circuit of the EMR pen by the electromagnetic field generated by the touch panel 261. At this time, when the EMR pen is in the first position (P1) and the signal received through the second electrode of the touch pad 261 is analyzed, a graph as shown in (b) of Figure 107 appears, and the point where the signal changes rapidly is shown. As a result of comparing the Y coordinate of the EMR pen identified through analysis and the Y coordinate of the first position (P1) of the EMR pen, they matched.

Afterwards, the signal received from the second electrode of the touch panel 261 at the second position P2 appeared as shown in (c) of FIG. 107. As a result of comparing the Y coordinate of the EMR pen identified at the point where the signal changes rapidly and the Y coordinate of the second position (P2) of the EMR pen, they matched. The graphs in (b) and (c) of Figure 107 are for the IQ sampling signal, where each line represents the ΔI signal and ΔQ signal, the vertical axis represents the size of the signal value, and the horizontal axis represents the second electrode (40). It means numbers numbered in order of arrangement.

Through the experiments shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, it was confirmed that the stylus 2 is driven by the touch input device 2 according to an embodiment of the present invention, and that the resulting signal can be accurately detected.

The touch input device according to an embodiment of the present invention can determine the touch position of the stylus by receiving various types of stylus signals. As mentioned above, the touch input device according to an embodiment of the present invention receives a signal from a stylus using a touch panel having at least one electrode (or pattern) that does not constitute a closed loop, so it is similar to a conventional touch sensor. It can be used as is, and the use of a stylus can be enabled through firmware upgrades for existing products that only detect touch with a finger, which has the effect of expanding the functionality of the existing product.

A touch input device according to an embodiment of the present invention includes a touch panel including a plurality of first electrodes extending in the Y axis and a plurality of second electrodes extending in the X axis, and calculating touch coordinates based on a signal received from a stylus. It includes a control unit (or touch controller) that makes the decision. At this time, as described above, the plurality of first electrodes and the plurality of second electrodes may not each form a closed loop.

At this time, a current signal rotating clockwise or counterclockwise around the tip of the stylus is induced by the electromagnetic field generated by the current induced in the resonance circuit of the stylus, and the control unit determines the touch coordinates based on the current signal. You will judge.

Specifically, a current signal is generated by the magnetic field generated by the stylus. The electromagnetic field generated by the current induced in the stylus' resonance circuit generates a current signal that rotates counterclockwise around the tip of the stylus. In another embodiment, a clockwise rotating current signal may be generated. A current signal rotating clockwise or counterclockwise may be, but is not limited to, an eddy current.

At this time, in response to the rotation direction of the current signal, the direction of the current flowing through the first electrode or second electrode of the touch panel disposed up, down, left, and right around the tip of the stylus is determined, and the current signal generated from the stylus is determined. , passing the tip of the stylus and passing a current in the opposite direction to the first electrode disposed on the left side and the first electrode disposed on the right side with respect to the virtual line parallel to the Y-axis, or passing through the tip of the stylus and passing the current in the Current in opposite directions flows through the second electrode disposed on the upper side and the second electrode disposed on the lower side based on the parallel virtual line.

By detecting the current induced in the first electrode and the second electrode, it is possible to precisely detect the coordinates where the tip of the stylus is located. In this regard, as described in detail above, redundant explanation will be omitted.

At this time, the stylus may be an active stylus that resonates on its own, including a resonance circuit and a power supply. The active stylus pen has a built-in resonance circuit and power supply. The power supply unit may be a battery, but may also be a module (wired connection terminal, wireless charging module, etc.) that receives power from the outside either wired or wirelessly. The active stylus can provide various additional functions such as pen pressure, hovering, and buttons.

In another embodiment, the stylus may be a passive stylus that includes a resonance circuit that resonates by an external signal. A passive stylus can be driven in various ways, such as inductive resonance, EMR (Electro Magnetic Resonance), and capacitive resonance.

In the case of a passive stylus, since it does not have a built-in power supply such as a battery, the pen is light in weight and has the advantage of being able to be operated anytime, anywhere.

When the passive stylus uses the EMR (Electro-Magnetic Resonance) method, the stylus may be activated by the electromagnetic field generated by the panel 261, as described above. When the passive stylus uses an electrically coupled resonance (ECR) method, the stylus may be activated by a signal transmitted by the electrode of the panel 261.

Meanwhile, a method of controlling a touch input device according to an embodiment of the present invention drives a stylus using a touch panel having a plurality of first electrodes extending along the Y-axis and a plurality of second electrodes extending along the X-axis. , receives signals from the stylus. At this time, the plurality of first electrodes included in the touch panel may not form a closed loop, and the plurality of second electrodes may not form a closed loop. Additionally, the first electrode and the second electrode may not form a closed loop with each other.

A control method of a touch input device according to an embodiment of the present invention includes a driving step of activating a stylus by individually controlling the direction of current flowing through a plurality of first electrodes or a plurality of second electrodes to generate an electromagnetic field, and activating the stylus in the stylus. It includes a determination step of determining touch coordinates based on the generated signal.

The driving step is performed by individually adjusting the direction of the current flowing through the first electrode or the second electrode based on the position of the first electrode or the second electrode centered on the tip of the stylus, thereby creating an electromagnetic field. , and the stylus is driven by this. Driving the stylus means that current is induced or resonance occurs in the internal resonance circuit. Of course, it is also possible to generate an electromagnetic field by simultaneously controlling the direction of the current flowing through the first electrode and the second electrode.

Although the plurality of first electrodes and the plurality of second electrodes included in the touch panel do not form a closed loop, the stylus can be driven only by controlling the direction of current. In other words, the stylus can be activated by generating an electromagnetic field using a touch panel consisting only of open loop electrodes (i.e., the ends of the plurality of first electrodes are not directly connected and the ends of the plurality of second electrodes are not directly connected). Therefore, a conventional touch panel can be used as is, and components such as an expensive digitizer are not required.

In the driving step, the current flowing through the first electrode disposed on the left side and the first electrode disposed on the right side with respect to an imaginary line passing through the tip of the stylus and parallel to the Y axis is driven in opposite directions, or the stylus is driven. The stylus is driven so that the current flowing through the second electrode disposed on the upper side and the second electrode disposed on the lower side are in opposite directions based on an imaginary line parallel to the X-axis passing through the tip of the stylus. Induces current or resonates in a resonance circuit.

When the stylus is activated by the driving step, a receiving step is performed.

A current is induced in the resonance circuit of the stylus by an electromagnetic field, and the magnetic field generated by the current induced in the resonance circuit induces a current signal that rotates clockwise or counterclockwise around the tip of the stylus, and is received. In this step, the current signal is received to determine the touch coordinates.

At this time, in response to the rotation direction of the current signal, the direction of the current flowing through the first or second electrodes disposed up, down, left, and right around the tip of the stylus is determined. Specifically, the current flowing in the first electrode disposed on the left side and the current flowing in the first electrode disposed on the right side with respect to the virtual line parallel to the Y axis passing through the tip of the stylus flow in opposite directions, and the current flowing in the first electrode disposed on the right side flows in opposite directions. Based on an imaginary line passing through the tip and parallel to the X-axis, the current flowing in the second electrode disposed on the upper side and the current flowing in the second electrode disposed on the lower side may flow in opposite directions.

Meanwhile, the signal measurement method of the touch input device shown in FIGS. 102 to 107 can be applied to the sensor unit and control unit shown in FIGS. 52 to 81. Specifically, any one of the first to fourth patterns 101, 102, 103, and 104 shown in FIG. 52 is the first electrode (121-1Y to 121Y-m) or the second electrode shown in FIG. 102. It may correspond to (121X-1 to 121X-n). For example, either the first pattern 101 or the second pattern 102 shown in FIG. 52 corresponds to the first electrodes 121-1Y to 121Y-m shown in FIG. 102, and Either the third pattern 103 or the fourth pattern 104 shown may correspond to the second electrodes 121X-1 to 121X-n shown in FIG. 102 .

As an example, the first pattern 101 shown in FIG. 52 corresponds to the first electrodes 121-1Y to 121Y-m shown in FIG. 102, and the third pattern 103 shown in FIG. In the case corresponding to the second electrodes 121 The third pattern 103 may be a pen sensing pattern in the vertical axis direction. In this case, the control unit that controls the sensor unit 100 receives stylus pen detection signals from the plurality of first patterns 101. The control unit selects a touch point on the horizontal axis of the stylus pen between two pen detection patterns that output two pen detection signals having the maximum and minimum values among the stylus pen detection signals received from the plurality of first patterns 101. You can decide. In addition, the control unit controls the touch on the vertical axis of the stylus pen between two pen detection patterns that output two pen detection signals having the maximum and minimum values among the stylus pen detection signals received from the plurality of third patterns 103. It can be decided by branch.

Alternatively, the control unit may determine a horizontal axis touch point of the stylus pen between patterns in which signals of two adjacent patterns have opposite signs among the stylus pen detection signals received from the plurality of first patterns 101 . Additionally, the control unit may determine a vertical axis touch point of the stylus pen between patterns in which signals of two adjacent patterns have opposite signs among the stylus pen detection signals received from the plurality of third patterns 103.

Alternatively, the control unit may differentiate the stylus pen detection signals received from the plurality of first patterns 101 and determine a predetermined position on the plurality of first patterns 101 where the differential value is maximum as the horizontal axis touch point of the stylus pen. there is. In addition, the control unit may differentiate the stylus pen detection signals received from the plurality of third patterns 103 and determine a predetermined position on the plurality of third patterns 103 where the differential value is maximum as the vertical axis touch point of the stylus pen. there is.

Alternatively, the control unit may receive a differential signal from two adjacent first patterns among a plurality of first patterns and determine the touch position of the stylus pen based on the maximum or minimum value of the received differential signal. For example, a predetermined position on the plurality of first patterns 101 that is the maximum or minimum value in the received differential signal may be determined as the horizontal axis touch point of the stylus pen. Here, the two adjacent first patterns may be two adjacent first patterns. Alternatively, the two adjacent first patterns may be two first patterns that are not adjacent to each other, and at least one other first pattern may be disposed between the two first patterns.

Additionally, the control unit may receive a differential signal from two adjacent third patterns among a plurality of third patterns and determine the touch position of the stylus pen based on the maximum or minimum value of the received differential signal. For example, a predetermined position on the plurality of third patterns 103 that is the maximum or minimum value in the received differential signal may be determined as the vertical axis touch point of the stylus pen. Here, the two adjacent third patterns may be two adjacent third patterns. Alternatively, the two adjacent third patterns may be two non-adjacent third patterns, and at least one other third pattern may be disposed between the two third patterns.

FIG. 108 is a block diagram showing a touch unit and a host, and FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of touch data provided from the touch unit to the host.

Referring to FIG. 108 , the host 270 may receive touch data from the touch controller 262 included in the touch unit 260. For example, the host 270 may include a mobile System-on-Chip (SoC), an Application Processor (AP), a Media Processor, a microprocessor, a Central Processing Unit (CPU), or It may be a similar device.

After one frame ends, the touch unit 260 may generate touch data related to the touch input during one frame and transmit it to the host 270.

Referring to FIGS. 72 and 73 , touch data 600 may be transmitted from the touch unit 260 to the host 270 and may include a touch count field 610 and at least one touch entity field 612 and 614. It can be included. In addition, the touch data 600 may further include sensor input data from the stylus pen 10, data indicating a change in the resonance signal, etc.

A value representing the number of touches input during one frame period may be entered in the touch count field 610. The touch entity fields 612 and 614 include fields indicating information about each touch input. For example, the touch entity fields 612 and 614 include a flag field 620, an X-axis coordinate field 621, a Y-axis coordinate field 622, a Z value field 623, an area field 624, and a touch action. Includes field 625.

The number of touch entity fields 612 and 614 may be the same as the value written in the touch count field 610.

A value representing a touch object may be entered in the flag field 620. For example, the finger, palm, and stylus pen may be entered into the flag field 620 with different values. A value representing the calculated touch coordinate may be entered in the X-axis coordinate field 621 and the Y-axis coordinate field 622. A value corresponding to the signal strength of the detection signal may be entered in the Z value field 623. A value corresponding to the area of the touched area may be entered in the area field 624.

According to embodiments, the host 270 that receives the touch data 600 uses the value of the area field 624 to determine that the touch object is a finger if the touch area is greater than the threshold, and if the touch area is less than or equal to the threshold. If so, it is determined that the touch object is the stylus pen 10.

According to embodiments, the host 270 that receives the touch data 600 may use the value of the flag field 620 to identify whether the touch object is a finger or the stylus pen 10.

Touch input devices according to various embodiments disclosed in this document may be of various types. The touch input device may include, for example, a portable communication device (eg, a smart phone), a computer device, a portable multimedia device, a portable medical device, a camera, a wearable device, or a home appliance. The touch input device according to the embodiment of this document is not limited to the devices described above.

The various embodiments of this document and the terms used herein are not intended to limit the technical features described in this document to specific embodiments, and should be understood to include various changes, equivalents, or replacements of the embodiments. In connection with the description of the drawings, similar reference numbers may be used for similar or related elements. The singular form of a noun corresponding to an item may include one or more of the above items, unless the relevant context clearly indicates otherwise. As used herein: “A or B,” “at least one of A and B,” “at least one of A or B,” “A, B, or C,” “at least one of A, B, and C,” and “ Each of the phrases such as “at least one of A, B, or C” may include all possible combinations of the items listed together in that phrase. Terms such as "first", "second", or "first" or "second" may be used simply to distinguish one component from another, and may refer to that component in other respects, such as importance or order) is not limited. One (e.g., first) component is “coupled” or “coupled” to another (e.g., second) component, with or without the terms “functionally” or “communicatively.” When referred to as “connected,” it means that a component can be connected to another component directly (e.g., wired), wirelessly, or through a third component.

The term “module” used in this document may include a unit implemented in hardware, software, or firmware, and may be used interchangeably with terms such as logic, logic block, component, or circuit, for example. A module may be an integrated part or a minimum unit of the parts or a part thereof that performs one or more functions. For example, according to one embodiment, the module may be implemented in the form of an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC).

Various embodiments of the present document are software (e.g., a program) including one or more instructions stored in a storage medium (e.g., internal memory or external memory) that can be read by a machine (e.g., a touch input device). ) can be implemented as. For example, a processor (eg, processor) of a device (eg, touch input device) may call at least one command among one or more instructions stored from a storage medium and execute it. This allows the device to be operated to perform at least one function according to the at least one instruction called. The one or more instructions may include code generated by a compiler or code that can be executed by an interpreter. Device-readable storage media may be provided in the form of non-transitory storage media. Here, 'non-transitory' only means that the storage medium is a tangible device and does not contain signals (e.g. electromagnetic waves). This term refers to cases where data is stored semi-permanently in the storage medium. There is no distinction between temporary storage cases.

According to one embodiment, methods according to various embodiments disclosed in this document may be included and provided in a computer program product. Computer program products are commodities and can be traded between sellers and buyers. The computer program product may be distributed in the form of a machine-readable storage medium (e.g. compact disc read only memory (CD-ROM)) or via an application store (e.g. Play StoreTM) or on two user devices (e.g. It can be distributed (e.g. downloaded or uploaded) directly between smart phones) or online. In the case of online distribution, at least a portion of the computer program product may be at least temporarily stored or temporarily created in a machine-readable storage medium, such as the memory of a manufacturer's server, an application store's server, or a relay server.

According to various embodiments, each component (eg, module or program) of the above-described components may include a single entity or a plurality of entities. According to various embodiments, one or more of the components or operations described above may be omitted, or one or more other components or operations may be added. Alternatively or additionally, multiple components (eg, modules or programs) may be integrated into a single component. In this case, the integrated component may perform one or more functions of each component of the plurality of components identically or similarly to those performed by the corresponding component of the plurality of components prior to the integration. . According to various embodiments, operations performed by a module, program, or other component may be executed sequentially, in parallel, iteratively, or heuristically, or one or more of the operations may be executed in a different order, or omitted. Alternatively, one or more other operations may be added.

Claims (67)

1. In a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit,

   The sensor unit,

   a plurality of first patterns extending along a first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit;

   a plurality of second patterns extending in the first direction and disposed adjacent to the first pattern;

   a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit; and

   A plurality of fourth patterns extending in the second direction and disposed adjacent to the third pattern,

   Second end portions of at least some of the plurality of second patterns are electrically connected to each other,

   Second end portions of at least some of the plurality of fourth patterns are electrically connected to each other,

   The control unit is configured to apply a touch driving signal to the first plurality of patterns and receive a touch detection signal to the plurality of third patterns,

   The control unit is configured to apply a stylus pen driving signal to at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first to fourth patterns,

   The control unit is configured to receive stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the plurality of first to fourth patterns,

   The stylus pen is,

   a body portion at least partially extending in one direction;

   an inductor unit including a ferrite core disposed in the body unit and a coil wound in a multi-layer structure on at least a portion of the ferrite core;

   a capacitor portion disposed within the body portion and including a capacitor electrically connected to the coil of the inductor portion; and

   A core body at least partially disposed within the body portion and moving along the one direction by pressure applied to one end;

   The capacitor unit includes a first electrode interlocking with the core body and a second electrode fixedly installed on the first electrode in the one direction,

   A stylus pen in which the capacitance of the capacitor portion changes by pressure applied to one end of the core body.
2. In a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit,

   The sensor unit,

   a plurality of first patterns extending along a first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit;

   a plurality of second patterns extending in the first direction and disposed adjacent to the first pattern;

   a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit; and

   A plurality of fourth patterns extending in the second direction and disposed adjacent to the third pattern,

   Second end portions of at least some of the plurality of second patterns are electrically connected to each other,

   Second end portions of at least some of the plurality of fourth patterns are electrically connected to each other,

   The control unit is configured to apply a touch driving signal to the first plurality of patterns and receive a touch detection signal to the plurality of third patterns,

   The control unit is configured to apply a stylus pen driving signal to at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first to fourth patterns,

   The control unit is configured to receive stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the plurality of first to fourth patterns,

   The stylus pen is,

   body part;

   an inductor unit fixedly installed in the body unit and including a ferrite core having a through hole penetrating in one direction, and a coil wound in a multi-layer manner on at least a portion of the ferrite core;

   A capacitor unit located within the body unit and including a capacitor electrically connected to the coil of the inductor unit; and

   At least a portion between one end and the other end is disposed in the through hole of the ferrite core, and the core moves along the one direction by pressure applied to the one end,

   The capacitor unit includes a first electrode connected to the other end of the core and interlocking with the core; And a second electrode fixedly installed on the first electrode,

   The first electrode moves in the one direction due to pressure applied to one end of the core, so that the overlap area between the first electrode and the second electrode changes.

   Stylus pen.
3. In a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit,

   The sensor unit,

   a plurality of first patterns extending along a first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit;

   a plurality of second patterns extending in the first direction and disposed adjacent to the first pattern;

   a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit; and

   A plurality of fourth patterns extending in the second direction and disposed adjacent to the third pattern,

   Second end portions of at least some of the plurality of second patterns are electrically connected to each other,

   Second end portions of at least some of the plurality of fourth patterns are electrically connected to each other,

   The control unit is configured to apply a touch driving signal to the first plurality of patterns and receive a touch detection signal to the plurality of third patterns,

   The control unit is configured to apply a stylus pen driving signal to at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first to fourth patterns,

   The control unit is configured to receive stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the plurality of first to fourth patterns,

   The stylus pen is,

   a body portion at least partially extending in one direction;

   an inductor unit including a ferrite core disposed in the body unit and a coil wound in a multi-layer structure on at least a portion of the ferrite core;

   a capacitor portion disposed within the body portion and including a capacitor electrically connected to the coil of the inductor portion; and

   A core body at least partially disposed within the body portion and moving along the one direction by pressure applied to one end;

   The ferrite core of the inductor part is interlocked with the core body,

   The inductor portion includes a magnetic material fixedly installed inside the body portion,

   A stylus pen in which the inductance of the inductor portion changes by pressure applied to one end of the core body.
4. In a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit,

   The sensor unit,

   a plurality of first patterns extending along a first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit;

   a plurality of second patterns extending in the first direction and disposed adjacent to the first pattern;

   a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit; and

   A plurality of fourth patterns extending in the second direction and disposed adjacent to the third pattern,

   Second end portions of at least some of the plurality of second patterns are electrically connected to each other,

   Second end portions of at least some of the plurality of fourth patterns are electrically connected to each other,

   The control unit is configured to apply a touch driving signal to the first plurality of patterns and receive a touch detection signal to the plurality of third patterns,

   The control unit is configured to apply a stylus pen driving signal to at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first to fourth patterns,

   The control unit is configured to receive stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the plurality of first to fourth patterns,

   The stylus pen is,

   body part;

   an inductor unit disposed within the body unit and including a ferrite core having a through hole penetrating in one direction, and a coil wound in a multi-layer structure on at least a portion of the ferrite core;

   A capacitor unit located within the body unit and including a capacitor electrically connected to the coil of the inductor unit; and

   At least a portion between one end and the other end is disposed in the through hole of the ferrite core, and the core moves along the one direction by pressure applied to the one end,

   The ferrite core of the inductor portion is coupled to the core and interlocks with the core,

   The inductor unit includes a magnetic body fixedly installed inside the body unit,

   The ferrite core moves in the one direction due to pressure applied to one end of the core body, so that the separation distance between the ferrite core and the magnetic material changes.

   Stylus pen.
5. In a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit,

   The sensor unit,

   a plurality of first patterns extending along a first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit;

   a plurality of second patterns extending in the first direction and disposed adjacent to the first pattern;

   a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit; and

   A plurality of fourth patterns extending in the second direction and disposed adjacent to the third pattern,

   Second end portions of at least some of the plurality of second patterns are electrically connected to each other,

   Second end portions of at least some of the plurality of fourth patterns are electrically connected to each other,

   The control unit is configured to apply a touch driving signal to the first plurality of patterns and receive a touch detection signal to the plurality of third patterns,

   The control unit is configured to apply a stylus pen driving signal to at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first to fourth patterns,

   The control unit is configured to receive stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the plurality of first to fourth patterns,

   The stylus pen is,

   a body portion at least partially extending in one direction;

   an inductor unit including a ferrite core disposed in the body unit and a coil wound in a multi-layer structure on at least a portion of the ferrite core;

   a capacitor unit disposed within the body unit and including a first capacitor electrically connected to the coil of the inductor unit and a second capacitor electrically connectable to the first capacitor;

   a core body at least partially disposed within the body portion and moving along the one direction by pressure applied to one end; and

   A switching member disposed within the body and switching the electrical connection between the first capacitor and the second capacitor according to movement of the core in the one direction,

   A stylus pen in which the capacitance of the capacitor portion changes by pressure applied to one end of the core body.
6. In a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit,

   The sensor unit,

   a plurality of first patterns extending along a first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit;

   a plurality of second patterns extending in the first direction and disposed adjacent to the first pattern;

   a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit; and

   A plurality of fourth patterns extending in the second direction and disposed adjacent to the third pattern,

   Second end portions of at least some of the plurality of second patterns are electrically connected to each other,

   Second end portions of at least some of the plurality of fourth patterns are electrically connected to each other,

   The control unit is configured to apply a touch driving signal to the first plurality of patterns and receive a touch detection signal to the plurality of third patterns,

   The control unit is configured to apply a stylus pen driving signal to at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first to fourth patterns,

   The control unit is configured to receive stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the plurality of first to fourth patterns,

   The stylus pen is,

   a body portion at least partially extending in one direction;

   an inductor unit including a ferrite core fixedly disposed within the body unit and a coil wound in a multi-layer structure on at least a portion of the ferrite core;

   a capacitor portion disposed within the body portion and electrically connected to the inductor portion;

   a core body at least partially disposed within the body portion and moving along the one direction by pressure applied to one end; and

   A magnetic body disposed within the body portion and moving in the one direction in conjunction with the core body,

   A stylus pen in which the inductance of the inductor portion changes by pressure applied to one end of the core body.
7. In a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit,

   The sensor unit,

   a plurality of first patterns extending along a first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit;

   a plurality of second patterns extending in the first direction and disposed adjacent to the first pattern;

   a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit; and

   A plurality of fourth patterns extending in the second direction and disposed adjacent to the third pattern,

   Second end portions of at least some of the plurality of second patterns are electrically connected to each other,

   Second end portions of at least some of the plurality of fourth patterns are electrically connected to each other,

   The control unit is configured to apply a touch driving signal to the first plurality of patterns and receive a touch detection signal to the plurality of third patterns,

   The control unit is configured to apply a stylus pen driving signal to at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first to fourth patterns,

   The control unit is configured to receive stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the plurality of first to fourth patterns,

   The stylus pen is,

   body part;

   an inductor unit fixedly installed in the body unit and including a ferrite core having a through hole penetrating in one direction, and a coil wound in a multi-layer manner on at least a portion of the ferrite core;

   A capacitor unit located within the body unit and including a capacitor electrically connected to the coil of the inductor unit and an additional capacitor electrically connectable to the capacitor;

   At least a portion between one end and the other end is disposed in the through hole of the ferrite core, and moves along the one direction by pressure applied to the one end; and

   A switching member that switches the electrical connection between the capacitor and the additional capacitor according to the pressure applied to the core,

   The inductor unit includes a magnetic material whose separation distance from the ferrite core changes depending on the pressure applied to the core body,

   Stylus pen.
8. In a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit,

   The sensor unit,

   a plurality of first patterns extending along a first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit; and

   a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit;

   The control unit is configured to apply a touch driving signal to the first plurality of patterns and receive a touch detection signal to the plurality of third patterns,

   The control unit is configured to apply a stylus pen driving signal to at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns,

   The control unit is configured to receive stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns,

   The stylus pen is,

   a body portion at least partially extending in one direction;

   an inductor unit including a ferrite core disposed in the body unit and a coil wound in a multi-layer structure on at least a portion of the ferrite core;

   a capacitor portion disposed within the body portion and including a capacitor electrically connected to the coil of the inductor portion; and

   A core body at least partially disposed within the body portion and moving along the one direction by pressure applied to one end;

   The capacitor unit includes a first electrode interlocking with the core body and a second electrode fixedly installed on the first electrode in the one direction,

   A stylus pen in which the capacitance of the capacitor portion changes by pressure applied to one end of the core body.
9. In a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit,

   The sensor unit,

   a plurality of first patterns extending along a first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit; and

   a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit;

   The control unit is configured to apply a touch driving signal to the first plurality of patterns and receive a touch detection signal to the plurality of third patterns,

   The control unit is configured to apply a stylus pen driving signal to at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns,

   The control unit is configured to receive stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns,

   The stylus pen is,

   body part;

   an inductor unit fixedly installed in the body unit and including a ferrite core having a through hole penetrating in one direction, and a coil wound in a multi-layer manner on at least a portion of the ferrite core;

   A capacitor unit located within the body unit and including a capacitor electrically connected to the coil of the inductor unit; and

   At least a portion between one end and the other end is disposed in the through hole of the ferrite core, and moves along the one direction by pressure applied to the one end;

   The capacitor unit includes a first electrode connected to the other end of the core and interlocking with the core; And a second electrode fixedly installed on the first electrode,

   The first electrode moves in the one direction due to pressure applied to one end of the core, so that the overlap area between the first electrode and the second electrode changes.

   Stylus pen.
10. In a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit,

    The sensor unit,

    a plurality of first patterns extending along a first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit; and

    a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit;

    The control unit is configured to apply a touch driving signal to the first plurality of patterns and receive a touch detection signal to the plurality of third patterns,

    The control unit is configured to apply a stylus pen driving signal to at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns,

    The control unit is configured to receive stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns,

    The stylus pen is,

    a body portion at least partially extending in one direction;

    an inductor unit including a ferrite core disposed in the body unit and a coil wound in a multi-layer structure on at least a portion of the ferrite core;

    a capacitor portion disposed within the body portion and including a capacitor electrically connected to the coil of the inductor portion; and

    It includes a core body, at least a portion of which is disposed within the body portion and moves along the one direction by pressure applied to one end,

    The ferrite core of the inductor part is interlocked with the core body,

    The inductor portion includes a magnetic material fixedly installed inside the body portion,

    A stylus pen in which the inductance of the inductor portion changes by pressure applied to one end of the core body.
11. In a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit,

    The sensor unit,

    a plurality of first patterns extending along a first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit; and

    a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit;

    The control unit is configured to apply a touch driving signal to the first plurality of patterns and receive a touch detection signal to the plurality of third patterns,

    The control unit is configured to apply a stylus pen driving signal to at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns,

    The control unit is configured to receive stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns,

    The stylus pen is,

    body part;

    an inductor unit disposed within the body unit and including a ferrite core having a through hole penetrating in one direction, and a coil wound in a multi-layer structure on at least a portion of the ferrite core;

    A capacitor unit located within the body unit and including a capacitor electrically connected to the coil of the inductor unit; and

    At least a portion between one end and the other end is disposed in the through hole of the ferrite core, and the core moves along the one direction by pressure applied to the one end,

    The ferrite core of the inductor portion is coupled to the core and interlocks with the core,

    The inductor unit includes a magnetic body fixedly installed inside the body unit,

    The ferrite core moves in the one direction due to pressure applied to one end of the core body, so that the separation distance between the ferrite core and the magnetic material changes.

    Stylus pen.
12. In a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit,

    The sensor unit,

    a plurality of first patterns extending along a first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit; and

    a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit;

    The control unit is configured to apply a touch driving signal to the first plurality of patterns and receive a touch detection signal to the plurality of third patterns,

    The control unit is configured to apply a stylus pen driving signal to at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns,

    The control unit is configured to receive stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns,

    The stylus pen is,

    a body portion at least partially extending in one direction;

    an inductor unit including a ferrite core disposed in the body unit and a coil wound in a multi-layer structure on at least a portion of the ferrite core;

    a capacitor unit disposed within the body unit and including a first capacitor electrically connected to the coil of the inductor unit and a second capacitor electrically connectable to the first capacitor;

    a core body at least partially disposed within the body portion and moving along the one direction by pressure applied to one end; and

    A switching member disposed within the body and switching the electrical connection between the first capacitor and the second capacitor according to movement of the core in the one direction,

    A stylus pen in which the capacitance of the capacitor portion changes by pressure applied to one end of the core body.
13. In a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit,

    The sensor unit,

    a plurality of first patterns extending along a first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit; and

    a plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit;

    The control unit is configured to apply a touch driving signal to the first plurality of patterns and receive a touch detection signal to the plurality of third patterns,

    The control unit is configured to apply a stylus pen driving signal to at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns,

    The control unit is configured to receive stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns,

    The stylus pen is,

    a body portion at least partially extending in one direction;

    an inductor unit including a ferrite core fixedly disposed within the body unit and a coil wound in a multi-layer structure on at least a portion of the ferrite core;

    a capacitor portion disposed within the body portion and electrically connected to the inductor portion;

    a core body at least partially disposed within the body portion and moving along the one direction by pressure applied to one end; and

    A magnetic body disposed within the body portion and moving in the one direction in conjunction with the core body,

    A stylus pen in which the inductance of the inductor portion changes by pressure applied to one end of the core body.
14. In a stylus pen capable of operating with a touch input device including a sensor unit and a control unit for controlling the sensor unit,

    The sensor unit,

    a plurality of first patterns extending along a first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit; and

    A plurality of third patterns extending in a second direction different from the first direction and having first side ends electrically connected to the control unit,

    The control unit is configured to apply a touch driving signal to the first plurality of patterns and receive a touch detection signal to the plurality of third patterns,

    The control unit is configured to apply a stylus pen driving signal to at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns,

    The control unit is configured to receive stylus pen detection signals from at least one pen detection pattern among the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns,

    The stylus pen is,

    body part;

    an inductor unit fixedly installed in the body unit and including a ferrite core having a through hole penetrating in one direction, and a coil wound in a multi-layer manner on at least a portion of the ferrite core;

    A capacitor unit located within the body unit and including a capacitor electrically connected to the coil of the inductor unit and an additional capacitor electrically connectable to the capacitor;

    At least a portion between one end and the other end is disposed in the through hole of the ferrite core, and moves along the one direction by pressure applied to the one end; and

    A switching member that switches the electrical connection between the capacitor and the additional capacitor according to the pressure applied to the core,

    The inductor unit includes a magnetic material whose separation distance from the ferrite core changes depending on the pressure applied to the core body,

    Stylus pen.
15. According to any one of claims 1, 2, 8, and 9,

    The second electrode is a stylus pen having a through hole or cavity into which the first electrode is inserted.
16. According to any one of claims 1, 2, 8, and 9,

    Further comprising a dielectric disposed inside the through hole or cavity of the second electrode,

    The stylus pen wherein the dielectric has a through hole or cavity of a size into which the first electrode can be inserted.
17. According to claim 16,

    The stylus pen wherein the dielectric has different thicknesses or areas along the one direction.
18. According to claim 16,

    The dielectric includes a first dielectric and a second dielectric sequentially arranged along the one direction,

    A stylus pen wherein the dielectric constant of the first dielectric is greater than the dielectric constant of the second dielectric.
19. According to any one of claims 1, 2, 8, and 9,

    The stylus pen further includes an additional capacitor electrically connected to the first electrode when the first electrode moves a predetermined distance in the one direction due to pressure applied to one end of the core.
20. According to any one of claims 3, 4, 10, and 11,

    A stylus pen in which, when the pressure applied to one end of the core increases, the separation distance between the ferrite core and the magnetic material increases or decreases.
21. According to any one of claims 3, 4, 10, and 11,

    The stylus pen wherein the magnetic material has different thicknesses or areas along the one direction.
22. According to any one of claims 3, 4, 10, and 11,

    The stylus pen is wherein the magnetic body is disposed on the inner side of the body or protrudes from the inner side of the body.
23. The method according to any one of claims 5 to 7 or 12 to 14,

    The switching member includes a movable part coupled to the other end of the core body and interlocking with the core body, and a fixed part fixedly installed between the movable part and the ferrite core,

    The movable portion of the switching member includes a movable electrode electrically connected to the capacitor portion, and the fixed portion of the switching member includes a fixed electrode electrically connected to the capacitor portion,

    A stylus pen in which the movable part changes its contact state with the fixed part by pressure applied to the core body.
24. According to claim 23,

    When there is no pressure applied to one end of the core body, the movable part maintains contact with the fixed part so that the movable electrode is electrically connected to the fixed electrode,

    When pressure is applied to one end of the core, the movable electrode is electrically separated from the fixed electrode as the movable part moves, so that the movable electrode is electrically separated from the fixed electrode.
25. According to claim 24,

    A stylus pen in which the separation distance between the ferrite core and the magnetic material increases as the pressure applied to one end of the core increases after the movable electrode is electrically separated from the fixed electrode.
26. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    At least one of the second plurality of patterns and the plurality of fourth patterns is the pen driving pattern,

    Stylus pen.
27. According to claim 26,

    The remaining one of the plurality of second patterns and the plurality of fourth patterns is electrically floating,

    Stylus pen.
28. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    For applying a stylus pen drive signal for driving the stylus pen through a pattern different from the pattern for applying the touch drive signal and the pattern for receiving the touch detection signal,

    Stylus pen.
29. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    At least one of the first plurality of patterns and the plurality of third patterns is the pen driving pattern,

    Stylus pen.
30. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    For applying the stylus pen driving signal through a pattern such as a pattern for applying the touch driving signal or a pattern for receiving the touch detection signal,

    Stylus pen.
31. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    At least one of the plurality of first patterns and the plurality of third patterns becomes the pen sensing patterns,

    Stylus pen.
32. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    To receive the stylus pen detection signal through a pattern such as a pattern for applying the touch drive signal or a pattern for receiving the touch detection signal,

    Stylus pen.
33. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    The length of the first pattern and the second pattern is longer than the length of the third pattern and the fourth pattern,

    Stylus pen.
34. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    At least one of the plurality of first to fourth patterns is for applying a stylus pen driving signal for driving the stylus pen, and is for sensing a detection signal for detecting the stylus pen. thing,

    Stylus pen.
35. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    The first pattern includes a 1a pattern and a 1b pattern arranged along the first direction,

    The second pattern includes a 2a pattern and a 2b pattern arranged along the first direction,

    Second end portions of at least some of the plurality of second a patterns are electrically connected,

    Second side ends of at least some of the plurality of second b patterns are electrically connected,

    Second side ends of at least some of the plurality of 2a patterns and second side ends of at least some of the 2b patterns face each other,

    Stylus pen.
36. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    At least one of the first to fourth patterns includes a plurality of main pattern parts and a connection pattern part connecting two main pattern parts adjacent to each other among the plurality of main pattern parts,

    Stylus pen.
37. In clause 36

    At least some of the main pattern portions have a diamond shape,

    Stylus pen.
38. In clause 36

    The main pattern portion of the second pattern has a shape corresponding to the main pattern portion of the first pattern,

    The main pattern portion of the fourth pattern has a shape corresponding to the main pattern portion of the third pattern,

    Stylus pen.
39. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    The first or third pattern has an opening,

    The second pattern or the fourth pattern is respectively disposed inside the opening of the first pattern or the third pattern.

    Stylus pen.
40. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    The first pattern or the third pattern surrounds the second pattern or the fourth pattern, respectively.

    Stylus pen.
41. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    The first pattern and the second pattern are disposed on the same layer, or

    The third pattern and the fourth pattern are disposed on the same layer,

    Stylus pen.
42. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    At least some of the first patterns and at least some of the second patterns are disposed on the first layer,

    At least some of the third patterns and at least some of the fourth patterns are disposed on the second layer,

    Stylus pen.
43. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    Second side ends of the second plurality and the fourth plurality of patterns are electrically connected to each other through vias,

    Stylus pen.
44. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 14,

    The control unit,

    Applying a driving signal for touch sensing to at least one first pattern among the plurality of first patterns,

    Receiving a detection signal received from at least one third pattern among the plurality of third patterns

    It's for a stylus pen.
45. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    The control unit,

    To apply a driving signal for touch sensing to at least one first pattern among the plurality of first patterns and to receive a detection signal received from at least one third pattern among the plurality of third patterns,

    For connecting the plurality of second patterns or the plurality of fourth patterns with a plurality of driving circuit units,

    Stylus pen.
46. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 14,

    The control unit,

    Applying a driving signal for touch sensing to at least one first pattern among the plurality of first patterns,

    Receiving a detection signal received from at least one third pattern among the plurality of third patterns

    Containing a recording medium on which a program for executing is recorded,

    Stylus pen.
47. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    The control unit,

    Applying a driving signal for touch sensing to at least one first pattern among the plurality of first patterns,

    Receiving a detection signal received from at least one third pattern among the plurality of third patterns,

    Connecting the plurality of second patterns or the plurality of fourth patterns with a plurality of driving circuit units

    Containing a recording medium on which a program for executing is recorded,

    Stylus pen.
48. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 14,

    A plurality of driving circuit units for touch sensing; And a plurality of detection circuit units for touch sensing,

    The control unit

    Applying the touch driving signal to at least one of the plurality of first patterns or the plurality of third patterns through the plurality of touch sensing driving circuit units,

    To receive the touch detection signal received from at least one of the plurality of first patterns or the plurality of third patterns through the plurality of detection circuit units for touch sensing,

    A stylus pen for controlling.
49. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    Further comprising a plurality of pen driving circuits,

    The control unit

    Applying a signal identical to the touch driving signal to the plurality of second patterns or the plurality of fourth patterns through the plurality of pen driving circuits,

    A stylus pen for controlling.
50. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    The control unit,

    The stylus pen driving signal is output to at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first to fourth patterns,

    To output a driving signal that is opposite to the stylus pen driving signal to at least one driving pattern among the plurality of patterns,

    Stylus pen.
51. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    The control unit,

    outputting the stylus pen driving signal to at least one pen driving pattern among the plurality of first to fourth patterns; and

    outputting a driving signal that is opposite to the stylus pen driving signal to at least one other driving pattern among the plurality of patterns;

    A stylus pen including a recording medium on which a program for executing is recorded.
52. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 14,

    Driving circuitry for driving multiple pens

    It further includes,

    The control unit,

    Applying the stylus pen driving signal to at least one pen driving pattern through at least one pen driving driving circuit among the plurality of pen driving driving circuits,

    A signal opposite to the stylus pen driving signal is applied to at least one other pen driving pattern through at least one other pen driving driving circuit among the plurality of pen driving driving circuits,

    A stylus pen for controlling.
53. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 14,

    The control unit,

    An output value from at least one pen detection pattern among the pen detection patterns,

    Output value from at least one pen detection pattern among pen detection patterns different from the pen detection patterns

    Based on, for controlling to detect the stylus pen,

    Stylus pen.
54. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 14,

    The control unit,

    An output value from at least one pen detection pattern among the pen detection patterns,

    Output value from at least one pen detection pattern among pen detection patterns different from the pen detection patterns

    Based on, detecting the pen;

    Containing a recording medium on which a program for executing is recorded,

    Stylus pen.
55. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 14,

    Sensing circuitry for multiple pen sensing

    It further includes,

    The control unit,

    An output value from at least one pen sensing pattern among the pen sensing patterns sensed through at least one pen sensing sensing circuit among the plurality of pen sensing sensing circuits;

    An output value from at least one pen sensing pattern among pen sensing patterns different from the pen sensing patterns sensed through at least one other pen sensing sensing circuit among the plurality of pen sensing sensing circuits.

    Based on, for controlling to detect the pen,

    Stylus pen.
56. According to claim 55,

    At least some of the pen sensing sensing circuit units can be used for touch sensing,

    Stylus pen.
57. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    The control unit,

    Selecting at least one pattern among the plurality of first to fourth patterns as pen detection patterns,

    To sense a stylus pen signal emitted from the stylus pen through the selected pen sensing patterns,

    Stylus pen.
58. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    a capacitor connected to a pattern at the second end of the plurality of second patterns or the plurality of fourth patterns;

    Further comprising a stylus pen.
59. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    The second pattern is a bar pattern disposed inside the first pattern and extending in the first direction,

    The fourth pattern is a bar pattern disposed inside the third pattern and extending in a second direction,

    a plurality of fifth patterns disposed between the plurality of first patterns, having a shape that corresponds to and overlaps the main pattern portion of the third pattern, and being electrically connected to the fourth pattern;

    a capacitor connected to a pattern at the second end of the plurality of fifth patterns;

    a plurality of sixth patterns disposed between the plurality of third patterns, having a shape that corresponds to and overlaps the main pattern portion of the first pattern, and being electrically connected to the second pattern; and

    A stylus pen further comprising a capacitor connected to a pattern at the second end of the plurality of sixth patterns.
60. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    at least one trace directly connected to where the patterns located at the second end are electrically connected to each other and disposed outside the active area of the touch input device;

    Further comprising a stylus pen.
61. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    The sensor unit further includes at least one of a fifth pattern and a sixth pattern,

    The fifth pattern is disposed on a layer different from the layer on which any one of the third pattern and the fourth pattern is disposed, and is electrically connected to any one of the third pattern and the fourth pattern. connected and arranged to overlap in the vertical direction with at least a portion of the other of the third pattern and the fourth pattern,

    The sixth pattern is disposed on a layer different from the layer on which any one of the first pattern and the second pattern is disposed, and is electrically connected to any one of the first pattern and the second pattern. connected and arranged to overlap in the vertical direction with at least a portion of the other of the first pattern and the second pattern,

    Stylus pen.
62. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7,

    The first pattern and the second pattern are arranged on different layers, and the first pattern is arranged to overlap a portion of the second pattern in the vertical direction, or

    The third pattern and the fourth pattern are arranged on different layers, and the third pattern is arranged to overlap a portion of the fourth pattern in the vertical direction,

    Stylus pen.
63. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 14,

    Further comprising a plurality of traces connecting the pen sensing patterns and the control unit,

    The directions of current flowing in two traces corresponding to the two pen sensing patterns among the plurality of traces are opposite to each other,

    Stylus pen.
64. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 14,

    Further comprising a trace connecting the pen sensing patterns and the control unit,

    The trace is connected to a first side of some of the pen sensing patterns, and the trace is connected to a second side of the remaining patterns.

    Stylus pen.
65. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 14,

    A stylus pen further comprising a magnetic field shielding layer formed on a different layer from the sensor unit.
66. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 14,

    Further comprising a display panel,

    The display panel has a folding area that is bent about a folding axis and a non-folding area that is spaced apart by the folding area,

    The magnetic field shielding layer is located in correspondence with both the folding area and the non-folding area.
67. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 14,

    Further comprising a display panel,

    The display panel has a folding area that is bent about a folding axis and a non-folding area that is spaced apart by the folding area,

    The stylus pen wherein the magnetic field shielding layer is positioned to be spaced apart from the non-folding area.

Images